ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide
Transcription
ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide
This page is intentionally left blank. Preface This guide provides a variety of basic information about Web GUI for the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/ DX90. It should be referred to when setting up and maintaining the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/ DX90. This guide is specially written for ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI system administrators and operators. Knowledge of UNIX or Windows® systems is required. Seventh Edition January 2013 Structure of This Manual This manual consists of the following eight chapters and three appendices. ● Chapter 1 Outline This chapter describes the outlines, features, operation environment, and operating topology for GUI. ● Chapter 2 Startup and Shutdown This chapter describes how to start, exit, log on and log off from GUI, and information about operation screens. ● Chapter 3 Initial Setup This chapter describes the Initial Setup menu. ● Chapter 4 Status Menu This chapter describes the status display menu for the device. ● Chapter 5 Configuration This chapter describes the configuration related menu. Details for Configuration Wizard, RAID group management, volume management, and Advanced Copy management are provided. ● Chapter 6 Global Settings This chapter describes the user management, network settings, remote support settings, system settings, and Host I/F (host interface) management. ● Chapter 7 Maintenance This chapter describes the hardware maintenance procedures. 3 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED P2X0-0700-07ENZ0 Preface ● Chapter 8 Display and Download Information (Diagnosis) This chapter describes how to display and download ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 related information. "Install Site Certificate", "Factory Default List", and "The Maximum Number of Concurrent Volume Formats" are described in the appendices. Latest Information The information in this document is subject to change without notice for functionality expansion of ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 and improvement. The latest version of this document and the latest information about the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 is released in the following web-site. Access the following address if needed. http://www.fujitsu.com/global/services/computing/storage/eternus/products/diskstorage/dxentry/ Related Materials Other manuals for the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 are as follows: • ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Disk storage systems User Guide • ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 CLI User Guide • ETERNUS Disk storage systems User's Guide -Server Connection- (*1) *1: Download the required manuals for your device environment (server OS and host interface type, etc.) from the specified web site. Refer to the Documentation CD provided with the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/ DX90 for URLs of the manual download site. 4 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED P2X0-0700-07ENZ0 Preface Acknowledgments • Microsoft, Windows, and Windows Server are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and other countries. • UNIX is a registered trademark of The Open Group in the United States and other countries. • Oracle and Java are registered trademarks of Oracle and/or its affiliates. • AIX is a trademark of IBM Corp. • Red Hat is a registered trademark of Red Hat, Inc. • Linux is a trademark of Linus Torvalds. • HP-UX is a trademark of Hewlett-Packard in the U.S. and other countries. • VMware, VMware logos, Virtual SMP, and VMotion are either registered trademarks or trademarks of VMware, Inc. in the U.S. and/or other countries. • Egenera BladeFrame and Egenera PAN Manager are trademarks or registered trademarks of Egenera, Inc. in the USA and other countries. • VERITAS Volume Manager is a trademark of Symantec Corp. and its affiliated companies. • Mozilla, Firefox, and the Mozilla and Firefox logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of the Mozilla Foundation in the United States and other countries. • Other company names, product names, and service names are registered trademarks or trademarks of their respective owners. Abbreviations The following products will be represented throughout this manual by the following abbreviations. • Microsoft® Windows® 2000 Server operating system and Microsoft® Windows® 2000 Advanced Server operating system are abbreviated as Windows® 2000. • Microsoft® Windows Server® 2003, Standard Edition, and Microsoft® Windows Server® 2003, Enterprise Edition are abbreviated as Windows Server® 2003. • Microsoft® Windows Server® 2008, Standard Edition, and Microsoft® Windows Server® 2008, Enterprise Edition are abbreviated as Windows Server® 2008. • Windows® Server refers to both the Windows Server® 2003 and Windows Server® 2008. • Windows® refers to all the Windows products listed here: Windows® 2000, Windows Server® 2003, and Windows Server® 2008. • Oracle Solaris might be described as Solaris, Solaris Operating System, or Solaris OS. Microsoft product screen shot(s) reprinted with permission from Microsoft Corporation. 5 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED P2X0-0700-07ENZ0 Table of Contents Chapter 1 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 Outline ................................................................................................................ 9 Features ........................................................................................................... 10 Operating Environment .................................................................................... 11 Operating Topology .......................................................................................... 12 Chapter 2 2.1 2.2 2.3 2.4 2.5 2.5.1 2.5.2 Outline .......................................................................................9 Startup and Shutdown ...........................................................13 Startup .............................................................................................................. 13 Logon ............................................................................................................... 15 Logoff ............................................................................................................... 17 Exit ................................................................................................................... 18 Operation Screens ........................................................................................... 19 Screen structures ...................................................................................................................... 19 User Role ................................................................................................................................... 20 Chapter 3 Initial Setup .............................................................................26 Chapter 4 Status Menu ............................................................................44 4.1 4.1.1 4.1.2 4.1.3 4.2 4.3 4.4 4.5 4.6 Storage System Status .................................................................................... 44 Storage System ......................................................................................................................... 48 Controller Enclosure .................................................................................................................. 49 Drive Enclosure ......................................................................................................................... 54 RAID Group Status .......................................................................................... 57 Volume Status .................................................................................................. 59 Advanced Copy Status ..................................................................................... 61 Advanced Copy Path Status ............................................................................ 63 REC Buffer Status ............................................................................................ 65 Chapter 5 5.1 5.2 5.2.1 5.2.2 5.2.3 5.2.4 5.2.5 5.2.6 Configuration..........................................................................66 Configuration Wizard ........................................................................................ 66 RAID Group Management ................................................................................ 88 Create RAID Group ................................................................................................................... 88 Delete RAID Group .................................................................................................................... 93 Assign Hot Spare ....................................................................................................................... 94 Release Hot Spare .................................................................................................................... 96 Logical Device Expansion ......................................................................................................... 98 Set RAID Group Name ............................................................................................................ 101 6 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED P2X0-0700-07ENZ0 Table of Contents 5.2.7 5.2.8 5.3 5.3.1 5.3.2 5.3.3 5.3.4 5.3.5 5.3.6 5.3.7 5.3.8 5.3.9 5.3.10 5.4 5.4.1 5.4.2 5.4.3 5.4.4 5.4.5 5.4.6 5.4.7 5.4.8 5.4.9 5.4.10 Set Eco-mode Schedule .......................................................................................................... 102 Change CM Ownership ........................................................................................................... 109 Volume Management ..................................................................................... 111 Create Volume ......................................................................................................................... 111 Delete Volume ......................................................................................................................... 114 Format Volume ........................................................................................................................ 116 Encrypt Volume ....................................................................................................................... 118 LUN Concatenation ................................................................................................................. 120 RAID Migration ........................................................................................................................ 122 Initialize Snap Data Volume .................................................................................................... 126 Release Reservation ............................................................................................................... 128 Set Volume Name ................................................................................................................... 130 Configure LUN Mapping .......................................................................................................... 131 Advanced Copy Management ........................................................................ 139 Setup Snap Data Pool ............................................................................................................. 146 Manage Copy Session ............................................................................................................ 152 Register Copy License ............................................................................................................ 155 Modify Copy Parameters ......................................................................................................... 156 Modify EC/OPC Priority ........................................................................................................... 158 Modify Copy Table Size ........................................................................................................... 160 Set Copy Path ......................................................................................................................... 164 Modify Port Mode .................................................................................................................... 184 Modify REC Multiplicity ............................................................................................................ 186 Modify REC Buffer ................................................................................................................... 188 Chapter 6 6.1 6.1.1 6.1.2 6.1.3 6.2 6.2.1 6.2.2 6.2.3 6.2.4 6.2.5 6.2.6 6.2.7 6.3 6.3.1 6.3.2 6.3.3 6.3.4 6.3.5 6.3.6 Global Settings .....................................................................192 User Management .......................................................................................... 192 Setup User Account ................................................................................................................. 192 Change User Password ........................................................................................................... 195 Initialize User Account ............................................................................................................. 197 Network Settings ............................................................................................ 199 Setup Network Environment .................................................................................................... 199 Setup SNMP Agent ................................................................................................................. 203 Download MIB File .................................................................................................................. 208 Perform SNMP Trap Test ........................................................................................................ 209 Setup E-Mail Notification ......................................................................................................... 210 Display SMTP Log ................................................................................................................... 213 Renew SSL Certificate ............................................................................................................ 214 Remote Support ............................................................................................. 216 Display Support Information .................................................................................................... 216 Display Communication Log .................................................................................................... 217 Setup Remote Support ............................................................................................................ 218 Update Customer Information ................................................................................................. 226 Update Communication Environment Information ................................................................... 228 Setup Log Sending Parameters .............................................................................................. 230 7 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED P2X0-0700-07ENZ0 Table of Contents 6.3.7 6.4 6.4.1 6.4.2 6.4.3 6.4.4 6.4.5 6.4.6 6.4.7 6.5 6.5.1 6.5.2 6.5.3 6.5.4 Stop/Restart Remote Support ................................................................................................. 233 System Settings ............................................................................................. 235 Modify Date and Time ............................................................................................................. 235 Modify Storage System Name ................................................................................................. 237 Setup Encryption Mode ........................................................................................................... 238 Change Box ID ........................................................................................................................ 240 Setup Power Management ...................................................................................................... 242 Setup Subsystem Parameters ................................................................................................. 243 Setup Event Notification .......................................................................................................... 245 Host I/F Management .................................................................................... 252 Set Port Parameters ................................................................................................................ 254 Setup Host ............................................................................................................................... 263 Setup Host Response .............................................................................................................. 275 Modify Reset Group ................................................................................................................. 282 Chapter 7 7.1 7.1.1 Hot Expansion ................................................................................................ 285 Add Drive Enclosure ................................................................................................................ 286 Chapter 8 8.1 8.2 8.3 8.4 8.5 8.6 Maintenance..........................................................................285 Display and Download Information (Diagnosis)................289 Display Event Log .......................................................................................... 289 Export/Delete Log .......................................................................................... 290 Export Panic Dump ........................................................................................ 293 Start/Stop Performance Monitoring ................................................................ 296 Display Performance Information ................................................................... 299 Display Error Information ............................................................................... 300 Appendix A Install Site Certificate...........................................................302 A.1 A.2 For Internet Explorer ....................................................................................... 302 For Firefox ....................................................................................................... 307 Appendix B Factory Default List..............................................................310 Appendix C The Maximum Number of Concurrent Volume Formats ...329 Index .......................................................................................................331 8 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED P2X0-0700-07ENZ0 Chapter 1 Outline This chapter describes the outlines, features, operating environment, and operating topology for ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI (hereinafter referred to as "GUI"). GUI is installed in controllers of the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 (hereinafter also referred to as "the device"), and used for performing settings and maintenance via web browser. 1.1 Outline Use GUI to set the operating environment and check status for the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/ DX90. GUI can be operated from a web browser by connecting the PC via a LAN connection. *1 Operation Server ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 LAN Management Server Mail Server Program PC GUI Web Browser Operating via web browser *1: Connect the operation server and the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 with a Fibre Channel (FC), iSCSI, or SAS cable. Refer to "2.1 Startup" (page 13) for details of GUI start up. 9 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED P2X0-0700-07ENZ0 Chapter 1 Outline 1.2 Features 1.2 Features The features for GUI are as follows: ● Initial and basic settings by the wizard The wizard enables you to set the minimum requirement to run the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/ DX90 by following the instructions on the wizard screen. ● System status This function displays the device installation image. ● Disk configuration check function This function displays a list of disks. It is also possible to display the number of constructible RAID groups by specifying the RAID group configuration requirements. ● Checking the extent of a failure If a disk failure occurs, "Host Port", "Affinity Group", "Volume", "RAID group", and "installation location" can be referenced to determine the extent of the failure. ● Easy operation If a hardware failure is detected, the system administrator can receive a mail containing detected failure information. 10 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED P2X0-0700-07ENZ0 Chapter 1 Outline 1.3 Operating Environment 1.3 Operating Environment The following PC environment is required to use GUI. Confirmed operating environment Browsers Image resolution Version Microsoft Internet Explorer 6.0, 7.0, or 8.0 Mozilla Firefox 3.0.x, 3.5.x, or 3.6.x 1024 x 768 or more − Enable or disable the following items as the browser. Item Setting value Temporary Internet Files (Cache) Disable Style Sheet Enable JavaScript Enable Cookie Enable Proxy Server Disable The following example shows how to set internet options when using Internet Explorer: • General (Temporary Internet files and Style Sheet) Specify the following parameters. - Temporary Internet files Select [Every visit to the page] in [Check for newer versions of stored pages]. - Accessibility Clear all the checkboxes in [Formatting] and [User style sheet] fields. • Security (JavaScript) Specify one of the following items. - Custom Level Select [Enable] for [Active scripting]. - Trusted Sites Add the URL of ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90. • Privacy (Cookie) Specify the following items. - Advanced Select the method for handling Cookies in [Per-Site Privacy Actions]. - Sites When allowing Cookies for the specified Web site, add the URL of ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 in [Manage Sites]. • Connections (Proxy Server) Specify one of the following items in [LAN Settings]. - Clear the [Use a proxy server for your LAN] checkbox. - Click the [Advanced] button, and add the address for ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 in [Exceptions] field. 11 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED P2X0-0700-07ENZ0 Chapter 1 Outline 1.4 Operating Topology 1.4 Operating Topology GUI can be operated by a PC or workstation with a web browser installed, that is connected via a LAN. Two connection topologies are allowed: • Direct connection of the PC to the device • Network connection via an existing LAN The operating topology diagram below shows a direct connection with a LAN cable. Set by direct connection ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Setting PC *1 *1: Connect the setting PC and the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 with a LAN cable. Either a straight through or crossover LAN cable can be used. The operating topology diagram below shows operation on an existing network. PC Setting PC Set via network LAN Operation server ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 *2 *2: Connects the operation server and the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 using a Fibre Channel (FC), iSCSI, or SAS cable. 12 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED P2X0-0700-07ENZ0 Chapter 2 Startup and Shutdown This chapter describes how to start, exit, log on and log off from GUI, and information about operation screens. 2.1 Startup Startup the logon screen for GUI. Connect the PC and the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 using a LAN cable, and display the logon screen via the web browser. The procedure to start up the logon screen for GUI is as follows: Procedure 1 Directly connect the PC and MNT port of the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 via LAN cable. 2 Set the IP address and subnet mask for the PC to match the ETERNUS DX60/ DX80/DX90 network settings. 3 Enter the URL to the address bar in the web browser. Specify "http://IP address of the device/" or "https://IP address of the device" (Default IP address is "192.168.1.1"). → The logon screen for GUI is displayed. Refer to "2.2 Logon" (page 15) for detailed procedure to logon. 13 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED P2X0-0700-07ENZ0 Chapter 2 Startup and Shutdown 2.1 Startup The confirmation screens for site certificate may be displayed when using SSL (https) to start up GUI (the display contents vary according to your web browser). However, this should not cause any problems. Accept the site certificate and continue the process. The following shows an example when using Internet Explorer 7. There is a problem with this website's security certificate. The security certificate presented by this website was not issued by a trusted certificate authority. Security certificate problems may indicate an attempt to fool you or intercept data you send to the server. We recommend that you close this webpage and do not continue to this Web site. This warning will not be displayed after installing the site information. Refer to "Appendix A Install Site Certificate" (page 302) for procedure to install the site certificate to the your web browser. • Refer to "6.2.1 Setup Network Environment" (page 199) for procedure to set the IP address of the MNT port. • The following ports should be used for http and https connections: Protocol Port to be used (Default) http 80 https 443 End of procedure 14 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED P2X0-0700-07ENZ0 Chapter 2 Startup and Shutdown 2.2 Logon 2.2 Logon Log on to GUI to start the operation. The GUI operation screen appears. The menu displayed pertains to the logged on user role. An Advanced privilege user (CE) can access various maintenance/settings menus, a Standard user (SE) has operational access, and a Monitor user (general user) can access the status display menus. The following will cause an error. If this occurs, note the error message and try re-logging on after completing the process. • Attempting to logon while four users are already logged on. • Attempting to logon while another application is already logged on. The procedure for logging on is as follows: Procedure 1 Select the language (English or Japanese) from the logon screen. 2 Enter the Username and Password, and click the [Logon] button. The Username and the Password vary depending on which account is being used to logon. • Username root • Password root (Default) • Refer to "6.1 User Management" (page 192) for user accounts. • If the input error occurs, enter the Username and Password again to log on to the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90. 15 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED P2X0-0700-07ENZ0 Chapter 2 Startup and Shutdown 2.2 Logon → The operation screen appears. Up to four users can be logged on concurrently. Logging on five or more users is not allowed. Also note that when attempting to logon, another user is already logged on and performing one of the following operations, a warning message appears and some functions cannot be used. Confirm the current GUI usage state and start operation. • Applying controller firmware • Applying disk firmware • RAID group diagnosis • Disk diagnosis End of procedure 16 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED P2X0-0700-07ENZ0 Chapter 2 Startup and Shutdown 2.3 Logoff 2.3 Logoff Log off from GUI to finish the operation. If no operation is performed for a specified period of time (60 minutes) after logging on, the relevant user is automatically logged off. The procedure for logging off is as follows: Procedure 1 Click the [Logoff] link on the top right of the screen. → A confirmation screen appears. 2 Click the [OK] button. → This completes the logging off process. The logon screen appears. End of procedure 17 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED P2X0-0700-07ENZ0 Chapter 2 Startup and Shutdown 2.4 Exit 2.4 Exit Exit from GUI. Make sure to perform "2.3 Logoff" (page 17) operation before exiting GUI. If exiting GUI without logging off, the logon status is not released. The procedure to exit is as follows: Procedure 1 Click the [Close] button for the web browser. → Exit from GUI. The logon screen does not appear. End of procedure 18 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED P2X0-0700-07ENZ0 Chapter 2 Startup and Shutdown 2.5 Operation Screens 2.5 Operation Screens This section provides a description about GUI operation screens. Click the [Help] link or [Help] button for a detailed explanation of the functions used during operation. An explanation (help) screen of the function is displayed. • Be sure to log off after all necessary operations are completed. • If the operation screen is not updated when accessing GUI, close the web browser, and log on again. 2.5.1 Screen structures The following shows the main contents that configure the operation screen. They are always displayed. ● Global Header ETERNUS DX60, ETERNUS DX80, or ETERNUS DX90 logo, [Logoff] and [Help] links, general status, device serial number, and date and time are displayed in the Global Header. General status of ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 is displayed as an image with character strings. ● Menu Bar Clicking the tabs in the menu bar displays sub menus related to the selected function. Clicking the sub menu with the "T" symbol displays pull-down menu options. 19 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED P2X0-0700-07ENZ0 Chapter 2 Startup and Shutdown 2.5 Operation Screens ● Title Bar The current function name is displayed. 2.5.2 User Role The available menus for GUI will differ according to the account type. The following table shows the difference between user roles. User role Available functions Default account Advanced "Advanced" is a maintenance engineer privilege. Setting maintenance such as status display, configuration management, and maintenance functions are available. f.ce Standard "Standard" is a system administrator privilege. Functions such as status display and configuration management are available. root Monitor "Monitor" is a general user privilege. Only the status display function is available. None ● Settings and functions for an Advanced privilege user • • • • • • • Initial Setup Status Volume Settings Global Settings Maintenance Diagnosis Utilities ● Settings and functions for a Standard privilege user • • • • • • Initial Setup Status Volume Settings Global Settings Maintenance (Add Drive Enclosures) Diagnosis ● Settings and functions for a Monitor privilege user • Status • Diagnosis (Display Event Log and Display Performance Information) 20 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED P2X0-0700-07ENZ0 Chapter 2 Startup and Shutdown 2.5 Operation Screens When specifying a Slave CM IP address for accessing the logon screen, the following GUI functions can be used. • Settings and functions for an Advanced privilege user - Status - Maintenance (Change Master CM) • Settings and functions for a Standard privilege user - Status • Settings and functions for a Monitor privilege user - Status The following table shows the availability of functions for each user role. Chapter Category User Role Function Monitor Standard Advanced Startup and Shutdown Logon OK OK OK Logoff OK OK OK Initial Setup Set Date and Time − OK OK Set Storage System Name − OK OK Change Password − OK OK − OK OK − OK OK (*1) Modify FC Port Mode Set Port Parameters Status Menu Setup Network Environment − OK OK Storage System Status OK OK OK RAID Group Status OK OK OK Volume Status OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK REC Buffer Status (*1) OK OK OK Configuration Wizard − OK OK RAID Group Management Create RAID Group − OK OK Delete RAID Group − OK OK Assign Hot Spare − OK OK Release Hot Spare − OK OK Logical Device Expansion − OK OK Set RAID Group Name − OK OK Set Eco-mode Schedule − OK OK Change CM Ownership − OK OK Modify RAID Group Parameters − − OK Advanced Copy Status Advanced Copy Path Status Configuration (*1) 21 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED P2X0-0700-07ENZ0 Chapter 2 Startup and Shutdown 2.5 Operation Screens Chapter Category Configuration Volume Management Advanced Copy Management User Role Function Monitor Standard Advanced Create Volume − OK OK Delete Volume − OK OK Format Volume − OK OK Encrypt Volume − OK OK LUN Concatenation − OK OK RAID Migration − OK OK Initialize Snap Data Volume − OK OK Modify Cache Parameters − − OK Release Reservation − OK OK Set Volume Name − OK OK Configure LUN Mapping − OK OK Setup Snap Data Pool − OK OK Manage Copy Session − OK OK Register Copy License − OK OK Modify Copy Parameters − OK OK Modify EC/OPC Priority − OK OK − OK OK − OK OK Modify Port Mode (*1) − OK OK Modify REC Multiplicity − OK OK Modify REC Buffer (*1) − OK OK Setup User Account − OK OK Change User Password − OK OK Initialize User Account − OK OK Setup Network Environment − OK OK Setup SNMP Agent − OK OK Download MIB File − OK OK Perform SNMP Trap Test − OK OK Setup E-Mail Notification − OK OK Display SMTP Log − OK OK Renew SSL Certificate − OK OK Modify Copy Table Size Set Copy Path (*1) (*1) Global Settings User Management Network Settings 22 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED P2X0-0700-07ENZ0 Chapter 2 Startup and Shutdown 2.5 Operation Screens Chapter Category Global Settings Remote Support System Settings Host I/F Management Maintenance User Role Function Monitor Standard Advanced Display Support Information − OK OK Display Communication Log − OK OK Setup Remote Support − OK OK Update Customer Information − OK OK Update Communication Environment Information − OK OK Setup Log Sending Parameters − OK OK Stop/Restart Remote Support − OK OK Download Controller Firmware − − OK Setup Firmware Update from Peer Storage System − − OK Modify Date and Time − OK OK Modify Storage System Name − OK OK Setup Encryption Mode − OK OK Change Box ID − OK OK Setup Power Management − OK OK Setup Subsystem Parameters − OK OK Setup Disk Patrol − − OK Setup SMI-S Environment − − OK Setup Event Notification − OK OK Set Port Parameters − OK OK Setup Host − OK OK Setup Host Response − OK OK Modify Reset Group − OK OK − − OK Start/End Maintenance 23 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED P2X0-0700-07ENZ0 Chapter 2 Startup and Shutdown 2.5 Operation Screens Chapter Category Maintenance Utilities Monitor Standard Advanced Hot Maintenance (*2) − − − Concurrent Preventive Maintenance − − OK Force Disable − − OK Force Enable − − OK Add Drive Enclosure − OK OK Remove Drive Enclosure − − OK Add Disk (*2) − − − Reduce Disk − − OK Add Controller Module − OK OK Apply Controller Firmware − − OK Register Disk Firmware − − OK Apply Disk Firmware − − OK Delete Disk Firmware − − OK Clear Sense Data − − OK Display Event Log OK OK OK Export/Delete Log − OK OK Export Panic Dump − OK OK Start/Stop Performance Monitoring − OK OK Display Performance Information OK OK OK Display Error Information − OK OK Export Configuration − − OK Get G-List − − OK Shutdown/Restart Storage System − − OK Initialize System Disks − − OK Cache Utilities Manage Pinned Data − − OK Force Write Back − − OK Recovery Utilities Apply Configuration − − OK Backup Configuration − − OK Reset Backup/Restore Fail − − OK Force Restore − − OK Reset Machine Down Recovery Fail − − OK Reboot All CMs − − OK Change Master CM (*3) − − OK Perform Disk Diagnostic − − OK Perform RAID Group Diagnostic − − OK Hardware Maintenance Firmware Maintenance Diagnosis User Role Function Diagnostic Utilities OK: Available −: Not available 24 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED P2X0-0700-07ENZ0 Chapter 2 Startup and Shutdown 2.5 Operation Screens *1: *2: *3: Function displayed for ETERNUS DX90. Function does not require any operation from GUI. Function displayed when specifying Slave CM IP address for accessing the logon screen. • Some functions are not displayed for some firmware versions and device model names. • "5.3.4 Encrypt Volume" (page 118) function will be available after using the "6.4.3 Setup Encryption Mode" (page 238) function. However, when the encryption function is not available, the "Setup Encryption Mode" is not displayed in the menu. 25 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED P2X0-0700-07ENZ0 Chapter 3 Initial Setup This chapter describes the Initial Setup menu. This menu supports the initial setup required before starting operations. ● Set Date and Time This screen is used to set the time/date and time zone (device location) of the internal clock. ● Set Storage System Name This screen is used to set the name, administrator, and installation site of the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Disk storage system. Information registered in this screen is used for the following functions and screens: - Network management using SNMP - Storage system name displayed in logon screen and operation screens - Friendly Name (storage system name)(*1) for Virtual Disk Service (VDS) *1: VDS is a storage management function of the Windows Server®. ● Change Password Change the password for the default account before starting operations. ● Modify Port Mode This menu is available when using an ETERNUS DX90. Change the port mode (Channel Adapter (CA) or Remote Adapter (RA)). - CA Used for connecting to the host. - RA Used for performing REC. ● Set Port Parameters Set the connection information for ports. There are three types of host interfaces; FC, iSCSI, and SAS. Procedures for setting port parameters vary depending on the host interface types. ● Setup Network Environment Set the environment for the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Disk storage system to communicate on the network such as IP address and subnet mask. 26 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED P2X0-0700-07ENZ0 Chapter 3 Initial Setup Note that the value specified in the Initial Setup menu can be changed subsequently. Refer to the following sections for details. Initial Setup Refer to: Set Date and Time Refer "6.4.1 Modify Date and Time" (page 235) Set Storage System Name Refer "6.4.2 Modify Storage System Name" (page 237) Change Password Refer "6.1.2 Change User Password" (page 195) Modify Port Mode Refer "5.4.8 Modify Port Mode" (page 184) Set Port Parameters Refer "6.5.1 Set Port Parameters" (page 254) Setup Network Environment Refer "6.2.1 Setup Network Environment" (page 199) Start the Initial Setup. The initial setup procedure is as follows: Procedure 1 Click the [Initial Setup] menu on the [Easy Setup] tab. → The Start screen of the [Initial Setup] function appears. 2 Click the [Next >] button. → Initial Setup starts. The "Set Date and Time" screen appears. 3 Set the following parameters, and click the [Next >] button. • Date/Time Information - Current Time Current date and time setting is displayed. - Date To change the "Current Time", input the new date and time. 27 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED P2X0-0700-07ENZ0 Chapter 3 Initial Setup • Time Zone Set the time difference (GMT). - Time Zone Select the Time Zone from the list box. If the appropriate Time Zone does not exist, select "Manually", and specify the time difference using "+" or "-", hour, and minute. • Daylight Saving Time - Set Select whether to set the Daylight Saving Time "ON" or "OFF" with the radio button. - Range If "Set" is "ON", set the Daylight Saving Time period. Select "by day of the week" or "by Date" with the radio button, and input the required parameters. When selecting "by day of the week", "Last" can be selected to specify the start or end week. When selecting "by Date", "Last Date" can be deleted to specify the start or end date. • NTP Service - NTP server Select "NTP enabled" or "NTP disabled" with the radio button. When NTP is enabled, input the IP address or domain name for the NTP server in the text box. ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 is synchronized with the NTP server in a step mode fashion. - LAN Port used for NTP Select the LAN port to be used for NTP connection from "MNT" or "RMT". - Access Status Access state to the NTP server is displayed. Click the [Skip >>] button to move on to the next screen without setting. → A confirmation screen appears. 28 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED P2X0-0700-07ENZ0 Chapter 3 Initial Setup 4 Click the [OK] button. → The date and time setting is set, and the "Set Storage System Name" screen appears. 5 Set the following parameters, and click the [Next >] button. • Name Specify the storage system name. Between 1 and 16 alphanumeric characters, symbols (except ', (comma)' and '?', and '% used as the first letter'), and blanks can be used. • Installation Location Specify the installation location of the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90. Between 1 and 50 alphanumeric characters, symbols (except ', (comma)' and '?', and '% used as the first letter'), and blanks can be used. • Administrator Specify the system administrator name. Between 1 and 50 alphanumeric characters, symbols (except ', (comma)' and '?', and '% used as the first letter'), and blanks can be used. • Description Specify the description of the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90. Between 1 and 50 alphanumeric characters, symbols (except ', (comma)' and '?', and '% used as the first letter'), and blanks can be used. • When setting the storage system name, all parameters in this menu must be set. • Once a parameter value is specified, the parameter cannot be deleted (values can be changed). → A confirmation screen appears. 29 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED P2X0-0700-07ENZ0 Chapter 3 Initial Setup 6 Click the [OK] button. → The storage system name is set, and the "Change Password" screen appears. 7 Set the following parameters, and click the [Next >] button. • User Name The current (your) user account name is displayed. • User Role The current (your) user role is displayed. • Old Password Enter the current password. • New Password Enter the new password between 4 to 16 characters. Alphanumeric characters and symbols ('! (exclamation mark)', '- (hyphen)', '_ (underscore)', and '. (period)') can be used. • Confirm New Password Enter the same character strings as the value entered in the "New Password" field for confirmation. When changing a user password, an error occurs in the following conditions. • When the "Old password" does not match the current password • When the "Old password", "New Password", and/or "Confirm New Password" is not entered • When the password does not match the confirmation password • When the password is less than 4, or more than 16 characters (If 17 or more characters are entered, ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 ignores the 17th and later characters, and the password is registered using the first 16 characters only) • When the password includes characters other than alphanumeric characters and symbols ('! (exclamation mark)', '- (hyphen)', '_ (underscore)', and '. (period)') 30 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED P2X0-0700-07ENZ0 Chapter 3 Initial Setup → A confirmation screen appears. 8 Click the [OK] button. → The password is changed. For ETERNUS DX60/DX80, the "Set Port Parameters" screen in Step 11 appears. For ETERNUS DX90, the "Modify Port Mode" screen in Step 9 appears. 9 Specify the Port Mode (After) and click the [Next >] button. → A confirmation screen appears. 31 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED P2X0-0700-07ENZ0 Chapter 3 Initial Setup 10 Click the [OK] button. → The port mode is changed, and the "Set Port Parameters" screen appears. 11 Set the following parameters, and click the [Next >] button. ●Set FC Port Parameters • When the port mode is "CA" - Port Select the target port. - Port Mode Port mode for the target port is displayed. - Connection Select the connection method for the target port from the "Fabric" or "FC-AL". When "FC-AL" is selected, it is necessary to assign a Loop ID to the port. - Set Loop ID When the "Connection" is "FC-AL", select "Manual" or "Auto" to specify the Loop ID. - Loop ID When the "Set Loop ID" is "Manual", specify the Loop ID (last 2 digits of 0x00 to 0x7D). When the "Set Loop ID" is "Auto", select "Ascending" or "Descending". - Transfer Rate (Gbit/s) Select the transfer speed of the target port from the following: • For 4Gbit/s models - Auto Negotiation - 1 - 2 - 4 • For 8Gbit/s models - Auto Negotiation - 2 - 4 - 8 - Frame Size (bytes) Select the frame size of the target port according to the destination server or switch (2048, 1024, or 512). - Host Affinity Select whether to "Enable" or "Disable" the Host Affinity function for the target port. Select "Enable" when restricting access to volumes for each server (when connecting via switches). Select "Disable" when restricting access to volumes for each port (when connecting directly to the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90). When connecting multiple servers and the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 directly and restricting access to volumes for each server, enable the Host Affinity setting. 32 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED P2X0-0700-07ENZ0 Chapter 3 Initial Setup - Host Response When the "Host Affinity" is "Disabled", select the host response to allocate to the target port. • 0:Default The initial pattern is displayed. Sense information is not converted. • Host Response (Number:Name) Identification number of the host response registered in the ETERNUS DX60/ DX80/DX90 is displayed. When the host response name is registered, it is also displayed. - Reset Scope Select the reset scope from "I_T_L" or "T_L". Reset scope is the range where the command reset request from the server is performed, when the port is connected to multiple servers. • I_T_L (I: Initiator, T: Target, L: LUN) Reset (cancel) the command request from the server that sent the command reset request. • T_L (T: Target, L: LUN) Reset (cancel) the command request from all servers that are connected to the port (regardless of whether the LUN is recognized). - Release Reservation if Chip is Reset Select whether to "Enable" or "Disable" the function to release the volume's reserved status when the target port (chip) is in Reset status. 33 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED P2X0-0700-07ENZ0 Chapter 3 Initial Setup • When the port mode is "RA" - Port Select the target port. - Port Mode Port mode for the target port is displayed. - Connection Select the connection method for the target port from the "Fabric" or "FC-AL". When "FC-AL" is selected, it is necessary to assign a Loop ID to the port. - Set Loop ID When the "Connection" is "FC-AL", select "Manual" or "Auto" to specify the Loop ID. - Loop ID When the "Set Loop ID" is "Manual", specify the Loop ID (last 2 digits of 0x00 to 0x7D). When the "Set Loop ID" is "Auto", select "Ascending" or "Descending". - Transfer Rate (Gbit/s) Select the transfer speed of the target port from the following: • Auto Negotiation • 2 • 4 • 8 Clicking the [Copy] button displays the screen for selecting the copy destination port. The port parameters are copied to the selected port. Note that copy can be performed between ports that have the same port mode. ●Set iSCSI Port Parameters - Port Select the target port. - IP Address Specify the IP address (0 to 255) for the target port (required). 34 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED P2X0-0700-07ENZ0 Chapter 3 Initial Setup Click the [Test Connection (ping)] button to display the [Send ping Command] screen. Specify the IP address of the connection destination device whose connection status is to be checked and number of execution, and click the [Send] button. Sending the "ping" command enables you to check whether the IP address is allocated correctly, and connection path to the destination device is normal. - Subnet Mask Set the subnet mask (0 to 255) for the target port (required). - Default Gateway Set the default gateway for the target port. - iSNS Server Select wether to use the iSNS server in the target port. When "Enable" is selected, specify the IP address (0 to 255) for the iSNS server. Internet Storage Name Service (iSNS) is almost equivalent to Domain Name System (DNS) for the Internet. iSNS server is used to convert the iSCSI name to the IP address on the iSCSI network. - iSCSI Name Set the iSCSI name for the target port. Between 4 and 223 alphanumeric characters and symbols (’- (hyphen)’, ’: (colon)’, ’. (period)’) can be used. Click the [Default] button to set the default iSCSI name. An iSCSI name is a unique name in the ETERNUS DX60/DX80. The same iSCSI name cannot be set to multiple iSCSI ports except the device iSCSI name. - Alias Name Set the alias name for the target port. Between 1 and 31 alphanumeric characters and symbols (including blanks) can be used. While the iSCSI name is a formal nomenclature that specifies the target iSCSI port, an alias name is used as nickname. - Host Affinity Select whether to "Enable" or "Disable" the Host Affinity function for the target port. Select "Enable" when restricting access to volumes for each server (when connecting via switches). Select "Disable" when restricting access to volumes for each port (when connecting directly to the ETERNUS DX60/DX80). When connecting multiple servers and the ETERNUS DX60/DX80 directly and restricting access to volumes for each server, enable the Host Affinity setting. - Host Response When the "Host Affinity" is "Disabled", select the host response to allocate to the target port. • 0:Default The initial pattern is displayed. Sense information is not converted. 35 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED P2X0-0700-07ENZ0 Chapter 3 Initial Setup • Host Response (Number:Name) Identification number of the host response registered in the ETERNUS DX60/ DX80 is displayed. When the host response name is registered, it is also displayed. - Jumbo Frame Select whether to enable or disable the Jumbo Frame. Select "Enable" when using the Jumbo Frame to transfer data via the target port. When not using the Jumbo Frame, select "Disable". Enabling Jumbo Frame increases the amount of data to be transferred per Frame, making data transfer more efficient. Confirm that the connected device (*1) supports the Jumbo Frame before enabling the Jumbo Frame. *1: When the ETERNUS DX60/DX80 and server are connected directly, this indicates that the connected device is a server side LAN card (NIC). When the ETERNUS DX60/ DX80 and server are connected via a switch, this indicates that the connected device is a switch. - Transfer Rate Select the transfer speed of the target port from the following: • Auto Negotiation • 100Mbit/s • 1Gbit/s Note that since the ETERNUS DX60/DX80 iSCSI port does not support the Half-Duplex mode, the connected device (*1) must be set as follows. Transfer speed of the ETERNUS DX60/DX80 *1: Transfer speed of the connected device (*1) Auto Negotiation Auto Negotiation 100Mbit/s 100Mbit/s (Full) 1Gbit/s 1Gbit/s When the ETERNUS DX60/DX80 and server are connected directly, this indicates that the connected device is a server side LAN card (NIC). When the ETERNUS DX60/DX80 and server are connected via a switch, this indicates that the connected device is a switch. - Reset Scope Select the reset scope from "I_T_L" or "T_L". Reset scope is the range where the command reset request from the server is performed, when the port is connected to multiple servers. • I_T_L (I: Initiator, T: Target, L: LUN) Reset (cancel) the command request from the server that sent the command reset request. • T_L (T: Target, L: LUN) Reset (cancel) the command request from all servers that are connected to the port (regardless of whether the LUN is recognized). - Release Reservation if Chip is Reset Select whether to "Enable" or "Disable" the function to release the volume's reserved status when the target port (chip) is in Reset status. 36 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED P2X0-0700-07ENZ0 Chapter 3 Initial Setup - CHAP Select "ON" when enabling CHAP authentication for the target port. To disable, select "OFF". For CHAP authentication, an encrypted password based on a random key that the ETERNUS DX60/DX80 receives from the host is sent, and connection possibility is judged on the server side. - CHAP User Name When "ON" is selected for "CHAP", specify the user name that accesses the target port. Between 1 and 255 characters of alphanumeric characters and symbols (including blanks) can be used. This setting is required when CHAP authentication (Bidirectional CHAP) is used. Make sure to set the user name and password in pairs. - Change CHAP Password When changing the CHAP password, select the checkbox. This checkbox can only be selected when "ON" is selected for "CHAP" and the password has already been set. - Password Specify the password for the currently specifying "Chap User Name". - New Password When "ON" is elected for "CHAP", specify the password that accesses the target port. Between 12 and 100 alphanumeric characters and symbols (including blanks) can be used. Make sure to set the user name and password in pairs. - Confirm new Password Input the same character strings as the value entered in the "New Password" field for confirmation. - Header Digest Select "OFF" when not adding Header Digest of the target port. When adding, select "CRC32C". Header Digest is a check code to be added to the header part of the iSCSI port detailed information. Specify "CRC32C" when the host requests to add the check code. "CRC32C" is algorithmic to create a check code. - Data Digest Select "OFF" when not adding Data Digest of the target port. When adding, select "CRC32C". Data Digest is a check code to be added to the data area of the iSCSI port detailed information. Specify "CRC32C" when the host requests to add the check code. "CRC32C" is algorithmic to create a check code. 37 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED P2X0-0700-07ENZ0 Chapter 3 Initial Setup • [Set iSCSI Port Parameters] screen (1/2) • [Set iSCSI Port Parameters] screen (2/2) 38 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED P2X0-0700-07ENZ0 Chapter 3 Initial Setup ●Set SAS Port Parameters - Port Select the target port. - Host Affinity Select whether to "Enable" or "Disable" the Host Affinity function for the target port. Select "Enable" when restricting access to volumes for each server. Select "Disable" when restricting access to volumes for each port. When connecting multiple servers and the ETERNUS DX60/DX80 directly and restricting access to volumes for each server, enable the Host Affinity setting. - Host Response When the "Host Affinity" is "Disabled", select the host response to allocate to the target port. • 0:Default The initial pattern is displayed. Sense information is not converted. • Host Response (Number:Name) Identification number of the host response registered in the ETERNUS DX60/ DX80 is displayed. When the host response name is registered, it is also displayed. - Reset Scope Select the reset scope from "I_T_L" or "T_L". Reset scope is the range where the command reset request from the server is performed, when the port is connected to multiple servers. • I_T_L (I: Initiator, T: Target, L: LUN) Reset (cancel) the command request from the server that sent the command reset request. • T_L (T: Target, L: LUN) Reset (cancel) the command request from all servers that are connected to the port (regardless of whether the LUN is recognized). - Release Reservation if Chip is Reset Select whether to "Enable" or "Disable" the function to release the volume's reserved status when the target port (chip) is in Reset status. → A confirmation screen appears. 39 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED P2X0-0700-07ENZ0 Chapter 3 Initial Setup 12 Click the [OK] button. → The port parameters are set, and the "Setup Network Environment" screen appears. 13 Set the following parameters, and click the [Next >] button. • Select Network Port Select the port to be used from the "MNT" or "RMT". • Interface - Speed and Duplex Select the communication speed and mode from the following. • Auto Negotiation • 1Gbit/s • 100Mbit/s Half • 100Mbit/s Full • 10Mbit/s Half • 10Mbit/s Full - Master CM IP Address Enter the IP address (0 to 255) for the Master CM in the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/ DX90 Disk storage system. - Slave CM IP Address Enter the IP address (0 to 255) for the Slave CM in the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/ DX90 Disk storage system. This setting is required to duplicate LAN path. When the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 has only one CM, a Slave IP address cannot be specified. - Subnet Mask Set the subnet mask (0 to 255) for the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Disk storage system. - Default Gateway Set the default gateway address (0 to 255) for the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Disk storage system. - Primary DNS Set the IP address for the Primary DNS server (0 to 255) for the ETERNUS DX60/ DX80/DX90 Disk storage system. - Secondary DNS Set the IP address for the Secondary DNS server (0 to 255) for the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Disk storage system. - http Select whether to "Enable" or "Disable" the http connection. This connection is used when accessing from GUI. - https Select whether to "Enable" or "Disable" the https connection. This connection is used when accessing from GUI. 40 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED P2X0-0700-07ENZ0 Chapter 3 Initial Setup - telnet Select whether to "Enable" or "Disable" the telnet connection. This connection is used when accessing from CLI. - SSH Select whether to "Enable" or "Disable" the SSH connection. This connection is used when accessing from CLI. - Maintenance Select whether to "Enable" or "Disable" the Maintenance connection. This connection is used when accessing from the monitoring software. - Maintenance-Secure Select whether to "Enable" or "Disable" the Maintenance-Secure connection. This connection is used when accessing from the monitoring software. This connection uses the data encryption for data transferring. - ICMP Select whether to "Enable" or "Disable" the ICMP connection. This connection is used when transferring ping command from PC. • Allowed IP List The value entered in this field is enabled when the default gateway has been set. Set the destination network address (IP address and subnet mask). Up to 16 addresses can be set. Make sure to set the IP address and subnet mask in pairs. • Note the following when specifying the IP address and subnet mask. - Specify the IP address using IPv4 notation (character string in d.d.d.d format based on the 256 radix system). - RMT port is used when it is required to use the dedicated network for Remote Support. IP addresses for the RMT port and MNT port must be in different subnets. - "Slave CM IP Address" is specified when connecting to the Slave CM. IP addresses for the Slave CM and Master CM must be in the same subnet. - Specify the IP address of "Default Gateway" when allowing access from outside of the subnetwork. The IP address must be in the same subnetwork as the port. - For "Allowed IP List", specify the IP address or network address of an ETERNUS DX Disk storage system to allow the ETERNUS DX Disk storage system to connect to the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90. These settings are not required when connecting the ETERNUS DX Disk storage system that belongs to the same network address (same sub-network) as the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90. • Access to the device will not be allowed if all protocol ports are disabled. When access to the device is not allowed, refer to "ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Disk storage systems User Guide" to reset the settings. 41 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED P2X0-0700-07ENZ0 Chapter 3 Initial Setup For the two CMs in the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90, the CM that has the priority to manage the device is called the Master CM, and the other is called the Slave CM. If a CM or LAN failure occurs, ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 changes the Master CM automatically. The IP address for prior Master CM is taken over to the new Master CM. Specifying an IP address for the Slave CM enables forcible changing of the Master CM. When an error occurs and access to the Master CM is disabled, users can access the Slave CM and change the Master CM. → A confirmation screen appears. 14 Click the [OK] button. → The Network Environment is set, and the "Finish" screen appears. 42 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED P2X0-0700-07ENZ0 Chapter 3 Initial Setup 15 Click the [Finish] button. → The [Initial Setup] completes. Device setting operation cannot be continued if the IP address is changed. Logon again with the new IP address is required. End of procedure 43 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED P2X0-0700-07ENZ0 Chapter 4 Status Menu This chapter describes the following status display menu. • Storage System Status • RAID Group Status • Volume Status • Advanced Copy Status • Advanced Copy Path Status • REC Buffer Status 4.1 Storage System Status This function is used to check the status of components configuring the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/ DX90. Status of each component in the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 is monitored periodically, and the result is displayed as a general status image with character strings. ● General Status The general status of ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 is displayed as an image with character strings in the Global Header. The general status is determined by each component status. A "Normal (green)" general status image indicates normal status, while other color images indicate a failure. The following table shows an each status images. Image Description ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 is in normal state. (Green) (Red) "Not Ready" is a status where an abnormality is detected at a power-off, and I/O access from the host cannot be received. ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 is in error state. (Red) 44 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED P2X0-0700-07ENZ0 Chapter 4 Status Menu 4.1 Storage System Status Image Description ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 is under maintenance. (Orange) ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 is in warning state. (Yellow) (Gray) The component is installed in the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90, but not used. ● General status image display priority A general status image is determined by integrated status of components such as Controller Enclosure, Drive Enclosure, and cables, which configures the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90. The following shows the general status display priority. High ← (Red: Not Ready) − maintenance work) − (Red: Error) − (Yellow: Warning) − (Orange: During (Green: Normal) − (Gray: Installed, but not used) → Low When the general status is changed, check the component status. Expand the device tree in the [Storage System Status] menu on the [Status] tab, and select the target component. ● Component Status Status of each component is displayed as a status symbol in the device tree of [Storage System Status] menu on the [Status] tab. The following table shows the component status symbols. Symbol (Green) (Red) (Yellow) (Orange) (Blue) (Gray) Description The component is in normal status. An error occurs in the component. The component requires the preventive maintenance. The component is under maintenance. The component is installed, but not used. (Caution) If a disk is in this state, "Normal (green)" is displayed instead of "Warning (yellow)" as a general status. Status other than described above is detected in the component. 45 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED P2X0-0700-07ENZ0 Chapter 4 Status Menu 4.1 Storage System Status ● Component list The following table shows the each component name in the device tree displayed on the left of the [Storage System Status] menu. Component name Description Remarks Enclosure (Storage system name registered in the "Chapter 3 Initial Setup" (page 26) or "6.4.2 Modify Storage System Name" (page 237)) Storage system name − Controller Enclosure Controller enclosure − Drive Enclosure Drive enclosure − Controller Module Controller module Displayed under the "Controller Enclosure". Expander Expander Displayed under the "Drive Enclosure". Port Host port Displayed under the "Controller Module". Power Supply Unit PSU (Power Supply Unit) Disks All disks in the device Displayed under the "Controller Enclosure" and "Drive Enclosure". Disk Each disk in the controller enclosure or drive enclosure Displayed under the "Disks". SAS Cable SAS cable − The procedure to display the storage system status is as follows: Procedure 1 Click the [Storage System Status] menu on the [Status] tab. → The [Storage System Status] screen appears. The device tree in the left of the screen displays the components that configure the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90. 46 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED P2X0-0700-07ENZ0 Chapter 4 Status Menu 4.1 Storage System Status • Clicking the [Manual Refresh] or [Auto-refresh] button changes the status refresh mode. - [Manual Refresh] button The displayed information is not updated automatically (Manual Refresh mode). Click the [Refresh] button to display the latest information. - [Auto-refresh] button (Default) The displayed information is automatically updated every one minute (Auto-refresh mode). • Clicking the [Refresh] button updates and displays the latest information. 2 Click the component icon to display the status. → Detailed information of the selected component is displayed on the right of the screen. 47 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED P2X0-0700-07ENZ0 Chapter 4 Status Menu 4.1 Storage System Status For details about displayed information, refer to the following sections. When clicking the [Turn on locator beacon] button, "IDENTIFY LED" on the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 front cover blinks blue or turns off. This button is used to identify the target controller or drive enclosure. End of procedure 4.1.1 Storage System Detailed information of the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 is displayed. ● Enclosure Status Display The following contents are displayed for the enclosure status display. Display contents Description Enclosure View Name Storage system name ("Friendly Name" for the VDS (*1)) Refer to "6.4.2 Modify Storage System Name" (page 237) for detailed procedure to register the storage system name. Model Name Model name (product ID) of the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Serial Number Serial number of the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Device Identification Number The device identification number is displayed. Status General status of the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Cache Mode Operational state of the cache (factor of "Write Through" state) (Write Back Mode / Write Through Mode (Pinned Data / Battery / Maintenance)) Remote Support Status of the remote support (Operating / Stopping / Maintenance / Not Configured) Operation Mode Operational state of the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 (Active / Maintenance) Controller Module connected to the GUI Controller module that can be controlled via GUI Firmware Version Current controller firmware version Controller Enclosure Status of the controller enclosure Drive Enclosure Status of the drive enclosure System Message *1: No. Number of the system message Message Details of the system message Virtual Disk Service (VDS) is a storage management function of the Windows Server®. 48 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED P2X0-0700-07ENZ0 Chapter 4 Status Menu 4.1 Storage System Status 4.1.2 Controller Enclosure This screen shows the status of controller enclosure and its components. ● Controller Enclosure Status Display The following contents are displayed for the Controller Enclosure status display. Display contents Description Controller Enclosure Display Front View Installation diagram for the front of the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Rear View Installation diagram for the rear of the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Information CE information Serial Number The unique number of the controller enclosure is displayed. The displayed contents vary depending on the location of the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90. Other Information The unique number of the controller enclosure is displayed. The displayed contents vary depending on the location of the ETERNUS DX60/ DX80/DX90. Intake Temp External temperature status of the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 (Normal / Error / Warning) Exhaust Temp Internal temperature status of the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 (Normal / Error / Warning) Front View Status, Capacity, Speed (rpm), Type, Usage, and RAID group of each component (disk) Rear View Status and Expanded Information of each component (CM and PSU) are displayed ● Controller Module Status Display The following contents are displayed for the Controller Module status display. Display contents Description CM Display Rear View Installation diagram for the rear of the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 CM Information CM Information Location Number of the controller module Status Status of the controller module (Normal / Maintenance / Error / Check1 / Undefined / Unconnected / Unmounted / Warning) Status Code Status code of the controller module Error Code Error factor of the controller module Memory Size (GB) Cache memory capacity of the controller module (GB) Type Type of the host port installed in the controller module (Fibre Channel (FC) model / iSCSI model / SAS model) WWN (for FC model or SAS model) WWN of the controller module 49 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED P2X0-0700-07ENZ0 Chapter 4 Status Menu 4.1 Storage System Status Display contents Description Part Number Component number of the controller module Serial Number Serial number of the controller module Hardware Revision Hardware revision of the controller module CPU Clock (MHz/GHz) Clock frequency of the CPU in the controller module Active EC Edition Control (EC) number of the currently running firmware Next EC EC number of the firmware that is to be run after the next power-on CM Internal Parts Information Status, Error Code, and Note for the following Parts (components) are displayed. - [for FC model / iSCSI model / SAS model] • Memory • BE Expander • BE EXP Port • DI Port • SCU • NAND Controller • Flash ROM - [for FC model only] • SAS Cable • FC Port - [for iSCSI model only] • SAS Cable • iSCSI Port - [for SAS model only] • SAS Port • FE Expander ● Port Status Display (for FC model) The following contents are displayed for the FC port status display. Display contents Description CM Display Rear View Installation diagram for the rear of the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 CM Port Information Location Number of the port Port Mode (*1) Mode of the port (CA / RA) Status Status of the port (Normal / Maintenance / Error / Undefined) Status Code Status code of the port Error Code Error factor of the port Type FC port type Connection Connection method to the host (Loop / Fabric) 50 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED P2X0-0700-07ENZ0 Chapter 4 Status Menu 4.1 Storage System Status Display contents *1: Description Loop ID Allocated ID when the fixed Loop ID is used (0x00 − 0x7D) Transfer Rate Port transfer rate (For 4Gbit/s model: 4Gbit/s / 2Gbit/s / 1Gbit/s / Auto Negotiation) (For 8Gbit/s model: 8Gbit/s / 4Gbit/s / 2Gbit/s / Auto Negotiation) Link Status Link status (For 4Gbit/s model: 4Gbit/s Link Up / 2Gbit/s Link Up / 1Gbit/s Link Up / Link Down) (For 8Gbit/s model: 8Gbit/s Link Up / 4Gbit/s Link Up / 2Gbit/s Link Up / Link Down) WWN WWN of the port Host Affinity Current Host Affinity function setting (enabled or disabled) Host Response Host response allocated to the port when the Host Affinity function is not used Part Number Component number of the port Serial Number Serial number of the port Hardware Revision Hardware revision of the port This item is displayed for ETERNUS DX90. ● Port Status Display (for iSCSI model) The following contents are displayed for the iSCSI port status display. Display contents Description CM Display Rear View Installation diagram for the rear of the ETERNUS DX60/DX80 CM Port Information Location Number of the port Status Status of the port (Normal / Maintenance / Error / Undefined) Status Code Status code of the port Error Code Error factor of the port Type iSCSI port type Transfer Rate Port transfer rate (1Gbit/s / 100Mbit/s / Auto Negotiation) Link Status Link status (1Gbit/s Link Up / 100Mbit/s Link Up / Link Down) iSCSI Name iSCSI name of the port iSCSI Alias Name iSCSI alias name of the port Host Affinity Current Host Affinity function setting (enabled or disabled) Host Response Host response allocated to the port when the Host Affinity function is not used 51 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED P2X0-0700-07ENZ0 Chapter 4 Status Menu 4.1 Storage System Status ● Port Status Display (for SAS model) The following contents are displayed for the SAS port status display. Display contents Description CM Display Rear View Installation diagram for the rear of the ETERNUS DX60/DX80 CM Port Information Location Number of the port Status Status of the port (Normal / Maintenance / Error / Undefined) Status Code Status code of the port Error Code Error factor of the port Type SAS port type Transfer Rate Port transfer rate (3Gbit/s) Link Status Link status (Phy#0: 3.0Gbit/s Link Up / 1.5Gbit/s Link Up / Link Down) (Phy#1: 3.0Gbit/s Link Up / 1.5Gbit/s Link Up / Link Down) (Phy#2: 3.0Gbit/s Link Up / 1.5Gbit/s Link Up / Link Down) (Phy#3: 3.0Gbit/s Link Up / 1.5Gbit/s Link Up / Link Down) SAS Address SAS Address of the port Host Affinity Current Host Affinity function setting (enabled or disabled) Host Response Host response allocated to the port when the Host Affinity function is not used. ● SAS Cable Status Display The following contents are displayed for the SAS cable status display. Display contents Description Controller Enclosure Display Rear View Installation diagram for the rear of the ETERNUS DX60/DX80 CM SAS Cable Information Status Status of the SAS cable (Normal / Error / Maintenance / Warning) Status Code Status code of the SAS cable Error Code Error factor of the SAS cable ● Power Supply Unit Status Display The following contents are displayed for the Power Supply Unit (PSU) status display. Display contents Description CE PSU Display Rear View Installation diagram for the rear of the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 CE PSU Information Location Number of the power supply unit Status Status of the power supply unit (Normal / Error / Maintenance) Status Code Status code of the power supply unit Error Code Error factor of the power supply unit 52 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED P2X0-0700-07ENZ0 Chapter 4 Status Menu 4.1 Storage System Status Display contents Description Part Number Component number of the power supply unit Serial Number Serial number of the power supply unit Hardware Revision Hardware revision of the power supply unit ● Disks Status Display The following contents are displayed for the Disks status display. Display contents Description Controller Enclosure Display Front View Installation diagram for the front of the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Information Front View Status, Capacity, Speed (rpm), Type, Usage, and RAID group for each component (disk) are displayed ● Disk Status Display The following contents are displayed for the Disk status display. Display contents Description Controller Enclosure Disk Display Front View Installation diagram for the front of the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Information Location Disk slot number Status Status of the disk (Unknown / Available / Broken / Not Available / Not Supported / Present / Readying / Rebuild / Copyback / Failed Usable / Spare / Formatting / Not Format / Not Exist / Redundant Copy) Status Code Status code of the disk Error Code Error factor of the disk Capacity Disk capacity (GB / TB) Type Disk size (2.5" / 3.5") and type (SAS / SSD) Speed (rpm) Speed of the disk Usage Usage of the disk (Data / System / Spare / −) RAID Group RAID group where disks are registered Motor Status Status of the disk motor (Active / In the Boot Process / Idle / In the Stop Process) Rebuild/Copyback Progress Rebuild/Copyback progress (%) Vender ID Vendor ID of the disk Product ID Product name of the disk Serial Number Serial number of the disk WWN WWN for the disk Firmware Revision Disk firmware version 53 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED P2X0-0700-07ENZ0 Chapter 4 Status Menu 4.1 Storage System Status 4.1.3 Drive Enclosure This screen shows the status of drive enclosure and its components. ● Drive Enclosure Status Display The following contents are displayed for the Drive Enclosure status display. Display contents Description Drive Enclosure Display Front View Installation diagram for the front of the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Rear View Installation diagram for the rear of the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Information DE Information Serial Number The unique number of the drive enclosure is displayed. The displayed contents vary depending on the location of the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/ DX90. Other Information The unique number of the drive enclosure is displayed. The displayed contents vary depending on the location of the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/ DX90. Intake Temp External temperature status of the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 (Normal / Error / Warning) Exhaust Temp Internal temperature status of the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 (Normal / Error / Warning) Front View Status, Capacity, Speed (rpm), Type, Usage, and RAID group of each component (disk) Rear View Status and Expanded Information of each component (EXP and PSU) are displayed ● Expander Status Display The following contents are displayed for the Expander status display. Display contents Description Drive Enclosure Display Rear View Installation diagram for the rear of the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 DE EXP Information DE EXP Information Status Status of the expander (Normal / Maintenance / Error / Undefined / Warning) Status Code Status code of the expander Error Code Error factor of the expander WWN WWN of the expander Part Number Component number of the expander Serial Number Serial number of the expander Hardware Revision Hardware revision of the expander Active EC EC number of the currently running firmware Next EC EC number of the firmware that is to be run after the next power-on 54 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED P2X0-0700-07ENZ0 Chapter 4 Status Menu 4.1 Storage System Status Display contents Description DE EXP Internal Parts Information Status and error code of each component (SAS Cable) are displayed ● SAS Cable Status Display The following contents are displayed for the SAS cable status display. Display contents Description Drive Enclosure Display Rear View Installation diagram for the rear of the ETERNUS DX60/DX80 DE EXP SAS Cable Information Status Status of the SAS cable (Normal / Error / Maintenance / Warning) Status Code Status code of the SAS cable Error Code Error factor of the SAS cable ● Power Supply Unit Status Display The following contents are displayed for the Power Supply Unit (PSU) status display. Display contents Description DE PSU Display Rear View Installation diagram for the rear of the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 DE PSU Information Location Number of the power supply unit Status Status of the power supply unit (Normal / Error / Maintenance) Status Code Status code of the power supply unit Error Code Error factor of the power supply unit Part Number Component number of the power supply unit Serial Number Serial number of the power supply unit Hardware Revision Hardware revision of the power supply unit ● Disks Status Display The following contents are displayed for the Disks status display. Display contents Description Drive Enclosure Display Front View Installation diagram for the front of the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Information Front View Status, Capacity, Speed (rpm), Type, Usage, and RAID group for each component (disk) are displayed 55 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED P2X0-0700-07ENZ0 Chapter 4 Status Menu 4.1 Storage System Status ● Disk Status Display The following contents are displayed for the Disk status display. Display contents Description Drive Enclosure Disk Display Front View Installation diagram for the front of the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 information Location Disk slot number Status Status of the disk (Unknown / Available / Broken / Not Available / Not Supported / Present / Readying / Rebuild/Copyback / Failed Usable / Spare / Formatting / Not Format / Not Exist / Redundant Copy) Status Code Status code of the disk Error Code Error factor of the disk Capacity Disk capacity (GB / TB) Type Disk size (2.5" / 3.5") and type (SAS / SSD) Speed (rpm) Speed of the disk Usage Usage of the disk (Data / System / Spare / −) RAID Group RAID group where disks are registered Motor Status Status of the disk motor (Active / In the Boot Process / Idle / In the Stop Process) Rebuild/Copyback Progress Rebuild/Copyback progress (%) Vender ID Vendor ID of the disk Product ID Product name of the disk Serial Number Serial number of the disk WWN WWN for the disk Firmware Revision Disk firmware version 56 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED P2X0-0700-07ENZ0 Chapter 4 Status Menu 4.2 RAID Group Status 4.2 RAID Group Status The [RAID Group Status] displays the status of RAID groups registered in the ETERNUS DX60/ DX80/DX90. The procedure to display the RAID group status is as follows: Procedure 1 Click the [RAID Group Status] menu on the [Status] tab. → The [RAID Group Status] screen appears. The tree and list of the registered RAID groups are displayed. 2 Click the target RAID group icon in the tree or link in the "RAID Group List" to display detailed information. • Clicking the [Manual Refresh] or [Auto-refresh] button changes the status refresh mode. - [Manual Refresh] button The displayed information is not updated automatically (Manual Refresh mode). Click the [Refresh] button to display the latest information. - [Auto-refresh] button (Default) The displayed information is automatically updated every one minute (Auto-refresh mode). • Clicking the [Refresh] button updates and displays the latest information. 57 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED P2X0-0700-07ENZ0 Chapter 4 Status Menu 4.2 RAID Group Status → The detailed information of the RAID group is displayed. End of procedure 58 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED P2X0-0700-07ENZ0 Chapter 4 Status Menu 4.3 Volume Status 4.3 Volume Status The [Volume Status] displays the status of volumes registered in the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/ DX90. The procedure to display the volume status is as follows: Procedure 1 Click the [Volume Status] menu on the [Status] tab. → The [Volume Status] screen appears. The tree and list of the registered volumes are displayed. 2 Click the target volume icon in the tree or link in the "Volume List" to display detailed information. • Clicking the [Manual Refresh] or [Auto-refresh] button changes the status refresh mode. - [Manual Refresh] button The displayed information is not updated automatically (Manual Refresh mode). Click the [Refresh] button to display the latest information. - [Auto-refresh] button (Default) The displayed information is automatically updated every one minute (Auto-refresh mode). • Clicking the [Refresh] button updates and displays the latest information. 59 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED P2X0-0700-07ENZ0 Chapter 4 Status Menu 4.3 Volume Status → Detailed information of the volume is displayed. The volume number and the location of the volume in the RAID group may be different. End of procedure 60 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED P2X0-0700-07ENZ0 Chapter 4 Status Menu 4.4 Advanced Copy Status 4.4 Advanced Copy Status The [Advanced Copy Status] displays the Advanced Copy related status. Refer to "5.4 Advanced Copy Management" (page 139) for details about Advanced Copy. The procedure to display the Advanced Copy status is as follows: Procedure 1 Click the [Advanced Copy Status] menu on the [Status] tab. → The [Advanced Copy Status] screen appears. Current Advanced Copy status and list of sessions are displayed. 61 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED P2X0-0700-07ENZ0 Chapter 4 Status Menu 4.4 Advanced Copy Status • Content that is displayed in the "Advanced Copy Property" and "List of Advanced Copy Sessions" fields vary depending on the session type that is selected. • The SnapOPC+ session type varies depending on the client information. - SnapOPC+ (by Host, all) A SnapOPC+ session that is created from the host (in which software such as Windows Volume Shadow Copy Service (VSS) and ETERNUS SF AdvancedCopy Manager (ACM) is installed). "VSS / ACS" is displayed as the client information. - Snap OPC+ (by LAN, oldest) A first generation SnapOPC+ session that is created from GUI or CLI. "GUI / CLI" is displayed as the client information. - SnapOPC+ (by LAN, all) A SnapOPC+ session that is created from GUI or CLI. "GUI / CLI" is displayed as the client information. End of procedure 62 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED P2X0-0700-07ENZ0 Chapter 4 Status Menu 4.5 Advanced Copy Path Status 4.5 Advanced Copy Path Status The [Advanced Copy Path Status] displays the status of the copy path between local and remote devices created for Advanced Copy (REC). Refer to "5.4.7 Set Copy Path" (page 164) for detailed procedures on creating the copy path. The [Advanced Copy Path Status] menu is available when using an ETERNUS DX90 device. The procedure for displaying the Advanced Copy Path status is as follows: Procedure 1 Click the [Advanced Copy Path Status] menu on the [Status] tab. → The [Advanced Copy Path Status] screen appears. Box IDs for the local and remote devices are displayed. • Clicking the [Manual Refresh] or [Auto-refresh] button changes the status refresh mode. - [Manual Refresh] button The displayed information is not updated automatically (Manual Refresh mode). Click the [Refresh] button to display the latest information. - [Auto-refresh] button (Default) The displayed information is automatically updated every one minute (Auto-refresh mode). • Clicking the [Refresh] button updates and displays the latest information. 63 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED P2X0-0700-07ENZ0 Chapter 4 Status Menu 4.5 Advanced Copy Path Status 2 Select the desired remote device (Box ID) to check the status of the copy path between it and the local device. → The current Advanced copy path status is displayed. End of procedure 64 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED P2X0-0700-07ENZ0 Chapter 4 Status Menu 4.6 REC Buffer Status 4.6 REC Buffer Status The [REC Buffer Status] function displays the REC buffer status. Refer to "5.4.10 Modify REC Buffer" (page 188) for detailed information about the REC buffer. The [REC Buffer Status] menu is available when using an ETERNUS DX90 device. The procedure for displaying the REC buffer status is as follows: Procedure 1 Click the [REC Buffer Status] menu on the [Status] tab. → The [REC Buffer Status] screen appears. A list of REC buffer statuses is displayed. • Clicking the [Manual Refresh] or [Auto-refresh] button changes the status refresh mode. - [Manual Refresh] button The displayed information is not updated automatically (Manual Refresh mode). Click the [Refresh] button to display the latest information. - [Auto-refresh] button (Default) The displayed information is automatically updated every one minute (Auto-refresh mode). • Clicking the [Refresh] button updates and displays the latest information. End of procedure 65 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED P2X0-0700-07ENZ0 Chapter 5 Configuration This chapter describes the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 configuration related menu. The following menus are provided: • Configuration Wizard • RAID Group Management • Volume Management • Advanced Copy Management 5.1 Configuration Wizard The [Configuration Wizard] function provides series of settings required for ETERNUS DX60/ DX80/DX90 operation on the wizard screen. This function provides configurations in the following order: Create RAID Group, Create Volume, Define Host, Configure Affinity Group, and Define LUN Mapping. Also, adding volumes and changing settings for existing RAID groups are available. • The value specified in each screen is immediately reflected to the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90. Even if the operation is canceled in the middle of it, the specified contents cannot be canceled. • Perform "6.5.1 Set Port Parameters" (page 254) before starting the Configuration Wizard. When using the Host Affinity functions, make sure to "Enable" the Host Affinity setting of the port. Refer to "6.5 Host I/F Management" (page 252) for details about the host affinity ● Create RAID Group Create a RAID group (group of disks configuring RAID in the device) on this screen. ● Create Volume Create volumes (disk area in the RAID group) on this screen. The server recognizes the volume as units of RAID configuration. ● Define Host Register the server information to be connected to the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 via a port. Define host setting is not needed when the Host Affinity function is not used. 66 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED P2X0-0700-07ENZ0 Chapter 5 Configuration 5.1 Configuration Wizard ● Configure Affinity Group Creates the group of volumes to be recognized from the server (affinity group). Associate a server recognized Logical Unit Number (LUN) and volume numbers. The server recognizes the affinity group using the Host Affinity setting that allocates the affinity group to the server. Configure Affinity Group setting is not needed when the host affinity function is not used. ● Define LUN Mapping Specify the volume to be recognized from the server. - When the host affinity function is used Allocate the affinity group for each server connected to the port (Host Affinity setting). - When the host affinity function is not used Allocate the volume number managed in the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 and server recognized LUN for each port (LUN mapping setting). Note that the value specified in the Configuration Wizard menu can be changed subsequently. Refer to the following sections for details. Configuration Wizard Refer to Create RAID Group Refer "5.2.1 Create RAID Group" (page 88) Create Volume Refer "5.3.1 Create Volume" (page 111) Define Host Refer "6.5.2 Setup Host" (page 263) Refer "5.3.10 Configure LUN Mapping" (page 131) Configure Affinity Group Define LUN Mapping The following shows the procedure of configuration wizard: Procedure 1 Click the [Configuration Wizard] menu on the [Easy Setup] tab. → The [Configuration Wizard] menu appears. 67 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED P2X0-0700-07ENZ0 Chapter 5 Configuration 5.1 Configuration Wizard 2 Click the [Start] button. → The Configuration Wizard starts. The [Create RAID Group] screen appears. 3 Set the following items, and click the [Next >] button. Select the RAID group creating method from the following: • Create RAID Group (Disks are assigned automatically) Creates a RAID group with an automatically selected disk. • Create RAID Group (Disks are selected manually) Creates a RAID group with a user specified disk. • Select existing RAID Group Creates volumes in an existing RAID group of ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90. When this item is selected, the "Select Target RAID Group" field is displayed. Select the RAID group to create volumes. Note that Step 4 and Step 5 in the following procedure are skipped when this method is used. - Create RAID Group (Disks are assigned automatically) 68 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED P2X0-0700-07ENZ0 Chapter 5 Configuration 5.1 Configuration Wizard - Create RAID Group (Disks are selected manually) - Select existing RAID Group → When "Create RAID Group (Disks are assigned automatically)" or "Create RAID Group (Disks are selected manually)" is selected: Move on to Step 4. When "Select existing RAID Group" is selected: Move on to Step 6. 69 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED P2X0-0700-07ENZ0 Chapter 5 Configuration 5.1 Configuration Wizard 4 Specify the following items, and click the [Create] button. • RAID Group Name Enter the RAID group name to be created. Between 1 and 16 alphanumeric characters, symbols (except ', (comma)' and '?', and '% used as the first letter'), and blanks can be used (required). • RAID Level Select the RAID level. Only RAID levels that are configurable per the currently installed disks are displayed. Specifying disks manually narrows down the selectable RAID level options. • Disk Capacity When selecting "Create RAID Group (Disks are assigned automatically)" in Step 3, select the disk capacity and number of disks to be used in the RAID group. Capacity is displayed only for disks that are actually installed and can configure the selected RAID group. The available number of disks varies depending on the specified RAID level. - RAID0: 2 − 16 - RAID1: 2 - RAID1+0: 4 − 32 (even number) - RAID5: 3 − 16 - RAID6: 5 − 16 - RAID5+0: 6 − 32 (even number) • Assigned CM Select the assigned CM for the RAID group from "Automatic", "CM#0", or "CM#1". Normally, select the "Automatic". When the "Automatic" is selected, the control CM to be assigned varies according to the RAID group number. If the RAID group number is an even number, CM#0 is assigned to the new RAID group. For an odd number RAID group, CM#1 is assigned to the new RAID group. When the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 has only one CM, CM#1 cannot be specified as the Assigned CM. • Select Disk When "Create RAID Group (Disks are selected manually)" is selected in Step 3, select the disks to be registered in the RAID Group (required). • A RAID group name that is already registered in the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 cannot be specified. • It is not possible to select more than, or less than, the specified number of configuration disks for each RAID level. • RAID0 has no data redundancy. RAID1, RAID1+0, RAID5, RAID6, and RAID5+0 are recommended for the RAID level. • If disks of different capacities exist in a RAID group, the smallest capacity becomes the standard, and all other disks are regarded as having the same capacity as the smallest disk. In this case, the remaining disk space will NOT be used. • SSD and SAS disks (SAS or Nearline SAS) cannot exist together in a single RAID group. 70 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED P2X0-0700-07ENZ0 Chapter 5 Configuration 5.1 Configuration Wizard - Create RAID Group (Disks are assigned automatically) - Create RAID Group (Disks are selected manually) → A confirmation screen appears. 71 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED P2X0-0700-07ENZ0 Chapter 5 Configuration 5.1 Configuration Wizard 5 Click the [OK] button. → A RAID Group is created. Move on to the [Create Volume] screen. Refer to "5.2.5 Logical Device Expansion" (page 98) or "5.2.8 Change CM Ownership" (page 109) to change the setting items after creating the RAID group. 6 Specify the following items, and click the [Create] button. • Volume Name Enter the volume name to be created. Between 1 and 16 alphanumeric characters, symbols (except ', (comma)' and '?', and '% used as the first letter'), and blanks can be used (required). • Type Select the volume type (Open or SDV). • Size (MB) Specify the volume capacity to be created in units of MB. Set the value between 24 to 8388607 (MB), or maximum capacity of the RAID group. When creating an SDV, the total SDV capacity (MB) and 0.1% of the copy source volume capacity is secured in the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90. 0.1% of the copy source volume is the capacity used for the controlling information area in the SDV. • Source Volume Size (MB) (SDV only) When SDV is selected for "Type", specify the total capacity of the copy source volume in units of MB. Set the value between 64 to 8388607 (MB). • Encryption This item is displayed only when encryption mode is enabled. Select whether to "Enable" or "Disable" encryption mode for the new volume. An encrypted volume cannot be changed to a non-encrypted volume. Refer to "6.4.3 Setup Encryption Mode" (page 238) and "5.3.4 Encrypt Volume" (page 118) for details. • Number of Volumes When creating multiple volumes with the same type and capacity, enter the number of volumes to be created. Created volume name is "specified volume name + running number starting from 0". 72 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED P2X0-0700-07ENZ0 Chapter 5 Configuration 5.1 Configuration Wizard → A confirmation screen appears. 7 Click the [OK] button. → Volumes are created. Move on to the [Define Host] screen. 8 Click the [Add] button. Define host setting is required when the host affinity function is used. 73 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED P2X0-0700-07ENZ0 Chapter 5 Configuration 5.1 Configuration Wizard - For FC host → The "Add New FC Host" field is displayed. - For iSCSI host → The "Add New iSCSI Host" field is displayed. 74 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED P2X0-0700-07ENZ0 Chapter 5 Configuration 5.1 Configuration Wizard - For SAS host → The "Add New SAS Host" field is displayed. 9 Specify the following items, and click the [Add] button. - For FC host • FC Port A list of FC ports that exist in the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 is displayed. When a fibre channel switch is connected to the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90, settings between the fibre channel switch and server (FC host) must be completed in advance. For ETERNUS DX90, only ports where the port mode is "CA" are displayed. Refer to "5.4.8 Modify Port Mode" (page 184) for detailed information about port modes. • WWN Select the WWN, or directly input a WWN (required). 16 capital letters and numerals can be used. • Name Input the FC Host Name (required). Between 1 and 16 alphanumeric characters, symbols (except ', (comma)' and '?', and '% used as the first letter'), and blanks can be used. • Host Response Specify the host response for the target host (required). Refer to "ETERNUS DX Disk storage systems User’s Guide -Server Connection-" for details. 75 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED P2X0-0700-07ENZ0 Chapter 5 Configuration 5.1 Configuration Wizard → The target FC host is displayed in the "Registered FC Host List" field. To add multiple FC hosts, repeat the procedure for all the FC hosts to be added. - For iSCSI host • iSCSI Port The list of iSCSI ports that exist in the ETERNUS DX60/DX80 is displayed. • iSCSI Name Select the iSCSI Name, or directly input the iSCSI Name. Between 4 and 223 alphanumeric characters and symbols (required) can be used. In the following conditions, iSCSI Name cannot be obtained automatically: • When the [Discover] button is inactivated • When "Disable" is selected for the "iSNS server" in the "Set iSCSI Port Parameters" • IP address Specify the IP address of the iSCSI host. When the IP address is not used for registering the host, this item is not required. • Name Specify the target host (iSCSI port) name (required). Between 1 and 16 alphanumeric characters, symbols (except ', (comma)' and '?', and '% used as the first letter'), and blanks can be used. • Host Response Specify the host response for the target host (required). Refer to "ETERNUS DX Disk storage systems User’s Guide -Server Connection-" for details. • Alias Name Specify the alias name of the target host (iSCSI port). Up to 31 alphanumeric characters and symbols can be used. • CHAP User ID Specify the user ID that accesses the target host (iSCSI port). Up to 255 alphanumeric characters and symbols can be used. It is not necessary to set this item if CHAP Authentication is not performed. 76 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED P2X0-0700-07ENZ0 Chapter 5 Configuration 5.1 Configuration Wizard • CHAP Password Specify the password to access the target host. Between 12 and 100 alphanumeric characters and symbols can be used. Make sure to set the user name and password in pairs. • Confirm CHAP Password Enter the same password as in the CHAP Password field. → The target iSCSI host is displayed in the "Registered iSCSI Host List" field. To add multiple iSCSI hosts, repeat the procedure for all the iSCSI hosts to be added. - For SAS host • SAS Port The list of SAS ports that exist in the ETERNUS DX60/DX80 is displayed. • SAS Address Select the SAS address, or directly input a SAS address (required). 16 capital letters and numerals can be used. • Name Specify the target host (SAS port) name (required). Between 1 and 16 alphanumeric characters, symbols (except ', (comma)' and '?', and '% used as the first letter'), and blanks can be used. • Host Response Specify the host response for the target host (required). Refer to "ETERNUS DX Disk storage systems User’s Guide -Server Connection-" for details. 77 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED P2X0-0700-07ENZ0 Chapter 5 Configuration 5.1 Configuration Wizard → The target SAS host is displayed in the "Registered SAS Host List" field. To add multiple SAS hosts, repeat the procedure for all the SAS hosts to be added. 10 When registering hosts completes, click the [Done] button. - For FC host 78 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED P2X0-0700-07ENZ0 Chapter 5 Configuration 5.1 Configuration Wizard - For iSCSI host - For SAS host 79 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED P2X0-0700-07ENZ0 Chapter 5 Configuration 5.1 Configuration Wizard 11 Click the [Next >] button. - For FC host - For iSCSI host 80 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED P2X0-0700-07ENZ0 Chapter 5 Configuration 5.1 Configuration Wizard - For SAS host → A confirmation screen appears. 12 Click the [OK] button. → The specified host setting is registered. Move on to the [Configure Affinity Group] screen. 13 Click the [Create] button. Creating affinity group is required when using the host affinity function. When the host affinity function is not used, click the [Next >] button to move on to the "Configure LUN Mapping" setting menu. Also, this setting is not required when using an existing affinity group (displayed in the "List of Affinity Group(s)" field). When using the existing affinity group, select the target group from the "List of Affinity Group(s)" field and click the [Edit] button. 81 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED P2X0-0700-07ENZ0 Chapter 5 Configuration 5.1 Configuration Wizard → The "Affinity Group Setting" and "Define LUN Mapping" fields are displayed. 14 Enter the affinity group name and specify a volume number corresponding to the LUN, and click the [Set] button. Specify the affinity group name. Between 1 and 16 alphanumeric characters, symbols (except ', (comma)' and '?', and '% used as the first letter'), and blanks can be used. A LUN is displayed as a decimal number. Set the volume number as a decimal number. → A confirmation screen appears. 82 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED P2X0-0700-07ENZ0 Chapter 5 Configuration 5.1 Configuration Wizard 15 Click the [OK] button. 16 Click the [Next >] button. → Move on to the [Define LUN Mapping] screen. 83 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED P2X0-0700-07ENZ0 Chapter 5 Configuration 5.1 Configuration Wizard 17 Select the port that is connected to the target server from the "Port List" field. For ETERNUS DX90, only ports where the port mode is "CA" are displayed. Refer to "5.4.8 Modify Port Mode" (page 184) for detailed information about port modes. ■ When using the Host Affinity function: (1)Click the [Edit] button. → The "Host Affinity Setting" field is displayed. (2)Assign the affinity group to the server, and click the [Set] button. → A confirmation screen appears. 84 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED P2X0-0700-07ENZ0 Chapter 5 Configuration 5.1 Configuration Wizard (3)Click the [OK] button. → Returns to the "Port List" screen. ■ When the Host Affinity function is not used: (1)Click the [Edit] button. Click the [Copy] button to copy the LUN mapping information from the other port. → The [Define LUN Mapping] field is displayed. 85 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED P2X0-0700-07ENZ0 Chapter 5 Configuration 5.1 Configuration Wizard (2)Adjust the LUN mapping information for the target port, and click the [Set] button. → A confirmation screen appears. (3)Click the [OK] button. → Returns to the "Port List" screen. 86 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED P2X0-0700-07ENZ0 Chapter 5 Configuration 5.1 Configuration Wizard 18 Click the [Finish] button. → A confirmation screen appears. 19 Click the [OK] button. → The Configuration Wizard screen is closed. End of procedure 87 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED P2X0-0700-07ENZ0 Chapter 5 Configuration 5.2 RAID Group Management 5.2 RAID Group Management The following settings are available for RAID group management. • Create/Delete RAID Group • Assign/Release Hot Spare • Logical Device Expansion • Set RAID Group name • Set Eco-mode Schedule • Change CM Ownership 5.2.1 Create RAID Group When changing the RAID settings or adding extra disks, you need to create new RAID groups. You can confirm the groups that are created from the [RAID Group Status] menu on the [Status] tab. ● Number of disks that can be set for each RAID level The number of disks that can be set for each RAID level is as follows. The available number of disks varies according to ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90. RAID level Number of disks that can be created ETERNUS DX60 ETERNUS DX80/DX90 Recommended number of disks RAID0 2 − 16 2 − 16 − RAID1 2 2 2(1D+1M) RAID1+0 4 − 24 4 − 32 4(2D+2M), 6(3D+3M), 8(4D+4M), 10(5D+5M) RAID5 3 − 16 3 − 16 3(2D+1P), 4(3D+1P), 5(4D+1P), 6(5D+1P) RAID6 5 − 16 5 − 16 5(3D+2P), 6(4D+2P), 7(5D+2P) RAID5+0 (3 − 12) × 2 (3 − 12) × 2 3(2D+1P) × 2, 4(3D+1P) × 2, 5(4D+1P) × 2, 6(5D+1P) × 2 88 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED P2X0-0700-07ENZ0 Chapter 5 Configuration 5.2 RAID Group Management ● The maximum number of RAID groups that can be set to each RAID level The maximum number of RAID groups that can be created is 12 for the ETERNUS DX60, and 60 for the ETERNUS DX80/DX90. The maximum number of RAID groups that can be set for each RAID level is as follows. The available number of RAID groups varies according to each device. RAID level Number of RAID groups that can be created ETERNUS DX60 ETERNUS DX80/DX90 RAID0 12 60 RAID1 12 60 RAID1+0 6 30 RAID5 8 40 RAID6 4 24 RAID5+0 4 20 ● The maximum number of volumes that can be set The maximum number of volumes that can be set for each RAID group and device is as follows. The available number of volumes varies according to each device. Device name per RAID group per device ETERNUS DX60 128 512 ETERNUS DX80/DX90 128 1024 • RAID groups can be created when the disk satisfies all the following conditions: - The disk is not one that configures a RAID group - The disk is not specified as a hot spare - The disk status is "Available" or "Present" • In the following conditions, RAID groups cannot be created: - There are no disks to configure the RAID group - When the maximum number of RAID groups has already been created Creating RAID groups is required before creating volumes. The procedure to create a RAID group is as follows: Procedure 1 Click the [Create RAID Group] under the [RAID Group Management] menu on the [Volume Settings] tab. → The [Create RAID Group] screen appears. 89 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED P2X0-0700-07ENZ0 Chapter 5 Configuration 5.2 RAID Group Management 2 Specify the following items, and click the [Next >] button. Select one of the following items: • Create RAID Group (Disks are assigned automatically) Creates a RAID group with automatically selected disks. • Create RAID Group (Disks are selected manually) Creates a RAID group with user specified disks. - Create RAID Group (Disks are assigned automatically) - Create RAID Group (Disks are selected manually) → The "New RAID Group" field is displayed. 90 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED P2X0-0700-07ENZ0 Chapter 5 Configuration 5.2 RAID Group Management 3 Specify the following items, and click the [Create] button. • RAID Group Name Enter the RAID group name to be created. Between 1 and 16 alphanumeric characters, symbols (except ', (comma)' and '?', and '% used as the first letter'), and blanks can be used. • RAID Level Select the RAID level. Only the configurable RAID level depending on the currently installed disks are displayed. When specifying the disks manually, selectable RAID level options are narrowed down. • Disk Capacity When selecting "Create RAID Group (Disks are assigned automatically)" in Step 2, select the disk capacity and number of disks to be used in the RAID group. Capacity is displayed only for the disks that are actually installed and can create the selected RAID group. Available number of disks varies depending on the specified RAID level. - RAID0: 2 − 16 - RAID1: 2 - RAID1+0: 4 − 32 (even number) - RAID5: 3 − 16 - RAID6: 5 − 16 - RAID5+0: 6 − 32 (even number) • Assigned CM Select the assigned CM for the RAID group from "Automatic", "CM#0", or "CM#1". Normally, select the "Automatic". When the "Automatic" is selected, the control CM to be assigned varies according to the RAID group number. If the RAID group number is an even number, CM#0 is assigned to the new RAID group. For an odd number RAID group, CM#1 is assigned to the new RAID group. When the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 has only one CM, CM#1 cannot be specified as the Assigned CM. • Select Disk When "Create RAID Group (Disks are selected manually)" is selected in Step 2, select the disks to be registered in the RAID Group (required). • A RAID group name that is already registered in the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 cannot be specified. • It is not possible to select more than, or less than, the specified number of configuration disks for each RAID level. • RAID0 has no data redundancy. RAID1, RAID1+0, RAID5, RAID6, and RAID5+0 are recommended for the RAID level. • If disks of different capacities exist in a RAID group, the smallest capacity becomes the standard, and all other disks are regarded as having the same capacity as the smallest disk. In this case, the remaining disk space will NOT be used. • SSD and SAS disks (SAS or Nearline SAS) cannot exist together in a single RAID group. 91 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED P2X0-0700-07ENZ0 Chapter 5 Configuration 5.2 RAID Group Management - Create RAID Group (Disks are assigned automatically) - Create RAID Group (Disks are selected manually) → A confirmation screen appears. 4 Click the [OK] button. → The RAID group is created. 92 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED P2X0-0700-07ENZ0 Chapter 5 Configuration 5.2 RAID Group Management Refer to "5.2.5 Logical Device Expansion" (page 98) or "5.2.8 Change CM Ownership" (page 109) to change the setting items after creating the RAID group. End of procedure 5.2.2 Delete RAID Group The [Delete RAID Group] function deletes the registered RAID groups. When a RAID group is deleted, the status of the disks that configured the RAID group change to data disks that are not used by any RAID group. RAID groups that have volumes registered cannot be deleted. All volumes must be deleted before deleting a RAID group. Refer to "5.3.2 Delete Volume" (page 114) for procedure to delete volumes. The procedure to delete RAID group is as follows: Procedure 1 Click the [Delete RAID Group] under the [RAID Group Management] menu on the [Volume Settings] tab. → The [Delete RAID Group] function screen appears. 2 Select the target RAID group, and click the [Delete] button. → A confirmation screen appears. 93 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED P2X0-0700-07ENZ0 Chapter 5 Configuration 5.2 RAID Group Management 3 Click the [OK] button. → The selected RAID group is deleted. End of procedure 5.2.3 Assign Hot Spare The [Assign Hot Spare] function registers a hot spare, which enables automatic data copy (Rebuild) in the background when a disk failure occurs. Hot spare is a disk that is available as a substitute for a failed disk. There are two types of hot spare as follows: • Global Hot Spare Hot spare used by all the RAID groups • Dedicated Hot Spare Hot spare used by the dedicated RAID group (one specific RAID group) A "Global Hot Spare" is a shared hot spare prepared in case a failure occurs in a RAID group. When preparing hot spares for a specific RAID group, register them as "Dedicated Hot Spare". Note the following items when adding a hot spare: • A system disk (Slot#0 to Slot#1 of the controller enclosure) cannot be specified as a hot spare. • A hot spare that substitutes for a failed disk must have the same or a larger capacity than the data disk. If the hot spare capacity is smaller than the data disk, the disk does not work as the hot spare. • Generally, a hot spare can be installed in any slot, with the exception of system disk installation locations. • When switching in a hot spare for a failed disk, a hot spare with the same capacity as the failed disk will be used first. If such a hot spare does not exist, a large capacity hot spare will be used (when there are multiple numbers of such disks, the smallest capacity hot spare among them is used). Note that a Global Hot Spare is used in this situation. • When you replace a failed disk, the data is copied back from the hot spare that is substituting for the failed disk, and the hot spare disk then returns to a spare disk. • When a mix of SAS disks, Nearline SAS disks, and SSDs are installed together in the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90, hot spare of each type is required. Install the hot spare that has the same capacity as the largest capacity disks of the same type installed in the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/ DX90. 94 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED P2X0-0700-07ENZ0 Chapter 5 Configuration 5.2 RAID Group Management The procedure to assign a hot spare is as follows: Procedure 1 Click the [Assign Hot Spare] under the [RAID Group Management] menu on the [Volume Settings] tab. → The [Assign Hot Spare] screen appears. 2 Specify the following items, and click the [Assign] button. • Hot Spare Type Select from the following items: - Global Hot Spare Global hot spare is shared by any RAID group in the device. - Dedicated Hot Spare Dedicated hot spare is used by specified RAID group. • Select an existing RAID Group When selecting the "Dedicated Hot Spare", specify the target RAID group. • Select Disk Select the disk to be used as hot spare. - When adding "Global Hot Spare" 95 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED P2X0-0700-07ENZ0 Chapter 5 Configuration 5.2 RAID Group Management - When adding "Dedicated Hot Spare" → A confirmation screen appears. 3 Click the [OK] button. → The hot spare is added. End of procedure 5.2.4 Release Hot Spare The [Release Hot Spare] function deletes a registered hot spare. A released disk can be used as a data disk after it is registered in a RAID group. Hot spare cannot be deleted in the following conditions: • When the usage of the hot spare is other than "Spare" • When the status of the hot spare is other than "Present" • When one of the following operations is in progress: - Registering controller firmware - Applying controller firmware - Registering disk firmware - Applying disk firmware - During the RAID group diagnosis - During the disk diagnosis 96 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED P2X0-0700-07ENZ0 Chapter 5 Configuration 5.2 RAID Group Management The procedure to delete hot spare is as follows: Procedure 1 Click the [Release Hot Spare] under the [RAID Group Management] menu on the [Volume Settings] tab. → The [Release Hot Spare] screen appears. 2 Specify the following items, and click the [Release] button. • Hot Spare Type Select one of the following as a condition of the hot spare to be released. - Global Hot Spare Global hot spare is shared by any RAID group in the device. - Dedicated Hot Spare Dedicated hot spare is used by a specified RAID group. • Criteria for Target Disk This field is displayed when selecting the "Dedicated Hot Spare". If the "Specify RAID Group" checkbox is selected, the target RAID group can be specified. • Select Disk Select the disk to be released as hot spare. - When releasing "Global Hot Spare" 97 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED P2X0-0700-07ENZ0 Chapter 5 Configuration 5.2 RAID Group Management - When releasing "Dedicated Hot Spare" → A confirmation screen appears. 3 Click the [OK] button. → The selected hot spare is deleted. End of procedure 5.2.5 Logical Device Expansion The [Logical Device Expansion] function expands the capacity of an existing RAID group by adding new disks or changing RAID levels. Normally, volume expansion requires adding RAID groups. This method requires multiple disks to be installed (used). However, this function can add disks to the existing RAID group in units of one disk. This enables capacity expansion of RAID groups with smaller number of disk expansion. This function can be performed with taking over data in the disks. 98 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED P2X0-0700-07ENZ0 Chapter 5 Configuration 5.2 RAID Group Management • Disks that are a different type (SAS/SSD) than the disks that configure the RAID group cannot be added. • Logical Device Expansion is not available in the following conditions: - RAID groups are not in normal status (Rebuilding, Copybacking, or using hot spare etc.) - When another Logical Device Expansion is being performed - When the disk diagnosis or RAID group diagnosis is in progress - When changing CM ownership (assigned CM) of the target RAID group - When the volume encryption, formatting volume, or LUN concatenation is in progress in the target RAID group - When the target RAID level or changed RAID level is RAID5+0 - Changing RAID level to RAID0 Note that existing volume size is not changed even if the RAID level is changed or capacity is expanded. The procedure for Logical Device Expansion is as follows: Procedure 1 Click the [Logical Device Expansion] under the [RAID Group Management] menu on the [Volume Settings] tab. → The [Logical Device Expansion] screen appears. 2 Select the target RAID group, and click the [Next >] button. → The "Modify RAID Group Configuration" screen appears. 99 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED P2X0-0700-07ENZ0 Chapter 5 Configuration 5.2 RAID Group Management 3 Specify the following items, and click the [Next >] button. • RAID Level Select (change) the RAID level. Only for adding disks, changing RAID level is not required. • Select Disk Select (add) disks according to the new RAID level. → A confirmation screen appears. 4 Click the [Start] button. → A confirmation screen appears. 100 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED P2X0-0700-07ENZ0 Chapter 5 Configuration 5.2 RAID Group Management 5 Click the [OK] button. → Logical Device Expansion is performed. End of procedure 5.2.6 Set RAID Group Name The [Set RAID Group Name] function can change the existing RAID group name. The procedure to change RAID group name is as follows: Procedure 1 Click the [Set RAID Group Name] under the [RAID Group Management] menu on the [Volume Settings] tab. → The [Set RAID Group Name] screen appears. 2 Change the target RAID group name, and click the [Set] button. Specify a new RAID group name. Between 1 and 16 alphanumeric characters, symbols (except ', (comma)' and '?', and '% used as the first letter'), and blanks can be used. RAID group name that is already registered in the ETERNUS DX60/ DX80/DX90 cannot be specified. → A confirmation screen appears. 101 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED P2X0-0700-07ENZ0 Chapter 5 Configuration 5.2 RAID Group Management 3 Click the [OK] button. → The RAID group name is changed. End of procedure 5.2.7 Set Eco-mode Schedule Eco-mode is a function that is specifically designed to reduce the power consumption that is characteristic of Massive Arrays of Idle Disks (MAID). Eco-mode saves power by managing the scheduled operation times of specified disks and stopping the motors of disks during periods when they are not required. The scheduled operation times can be set for each RAID group and for operations such as backing up. The [Set Eco-mode Schedule] provides the following functions: ● Eco-mode General Setting Enables or disables the Eco-mode setting for ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90. ● Eco-mode Schedule Setting Specifies the disk operating time (term for activating disk motor constantly) as an Eco-mode schedule. ● Apply Eco-mode Schedule Applies the created Eco-mode schedule for each RAID group. Disk operation time varies depending on the Eco-mode schedule settings and disk access. A disk is spun up even if it is outside of disk operation time in the following conditions: • If an access occurs while a motor is stopped The disk is immediately spun up and access proceeds normally after one to three minutes. • If a disk is activated more than a set amount of times in a day A state of increased access frequency is assumed and the Eco-mode will cease stopping the disk motor. 102 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED P2X0-0700-07ENZ0 Chapter 5 Configuration 5.2 RAID Group Management The following shows examples: • Operation schedule is set as 9:00 to 21:00, the allowed number of activations is one time, and there are no accesses outside of the scheduled period 1:00 9:00 Stopped 21:00 0:00 Stopped Scheduled Operation Drive Motor Running First activation Motor is spun up 30 minutes before start of operating time Motor is stopped 30 minutes after end of operating time • Operation schedule is set as 9:00 to 21:00, the allowed number of activations is one time, and there are accesses outside of the scheduled period No. of activations reset to 0 at 0:00 Access 1:00 9:00 21:00 Access finishes Scheduled Operation Drive Motors Running Drive Motors Running Drive Motors Running First activation: Count: 1 Motors spun up 30 minutes before start of scheduled time Second activation: Count: 2 Access OK in 1 - 3 minutes Motors stopped 30 minutes after end of scheduled time 0:00 Reset: Count: 0 Disk motors left running after access has finished because this was the 2nd activation 103 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED P2X0-0700-07ENZ0 Chapter 5 Configuration 5.2 RAID Group Management • To perform schedule operations using this function, the Eco-mode setting for the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 must be enabled. • Eco-mode is not available for the following disks. - System disks - Hot spares - SSD - Disks in a RAID group the satisfies the following conditions: • A RAID group including system disks • A RAID group where no volume is registered • A RAID group where SDPVs are registered • If any of the following conditions occur during the Eco-mode scheduled time, the disk motor is not inactivated. Note that the Eco-mode schedule will be re-enabled when these conditions have finished. - Target RAID group or volume status is other than "Available" - Performing functions that changes RAID group or volume configuration - During maintenance - During host access - During disk or RAID group diagnosis - Exporting G-List - Changing assigned CM for RAID group - Module error related to access path to the controller modules and disks is detected • When setting the Eco-mode for the Advanced Copy source/destination, it is necessary to schedule a disk motor to be activated while performing Advanced Copy. If it is difficult to schedule, do not set the Eco-mode to the copy source/destination. If the disks are inactivated, the Advanced Copy cannot be executed. • REC does not require that a disk motor be scheduled for activation while performing REC. If the disk motor was inactivated when REC started, ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 activates the disk motor automatically and starts the copy operation. • The target disks where Eco-mode schedule can be set are SAS disks and Nearline SAS disks. SSDs are not available for this function. Eco-mode General Setting Enables or disables the Eco-mode setting for ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90. The procedure for Eco-mode General Setting is as follows: Procedure 1 Click the [Set Eco-mode Schedule] under the [RAID Group Management] menu on the [Volume Settings] tab. → The [Set Eco-mode Schedule] screen appears. 104 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED P2X0-0700-07ENZ0 Chapter 5 Configuration 5.2 RAID Group Management 2 Specify the following items, and click the [Set] button. • Eco-mode Select whether to "Enable" or "Disable" the Eco-mode for ETERNUS DX60/DX80/ DX90. → A confirmation screen appears. 3 Click the [OK] button. → Eco-mode commonness setting is applied. End of procedure Eco-mode Schedule Setting Specify the disk operation time as an Eco-mode schedule. Up to 64 Eco-mode schedules can be created. The procedure to create the Eco-mode schedule is as follows: Procedure 1 Click the [Set Eco-mode Schedule] under the [RAID Group Management] menu on the [Volume Settings] tab. → The [Set Eco-mode Schedule] screen appears. 2 Click the "Schedule" icon from the tree in the left of the screen. → The "Schedule" field is displayed. 105 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED P2X0-0700-07ENZ0 Chapter 5 Configuration 5.2 RAID Group Management 3 Click the [Create] button. → The setting fields for new schedule is displayed. When changing or deleting the Eco-mode schedules, select the target event in the "Schedule" field or the tree in the left of the screen, and click the [Set] or [Delete] button. 4 Set the following items. • Schedule Name Specify the schedule name. Between 1 and 16 alphanumeric characters, symbols (except ', (comma)' and '?', and '% used as the first letter'), and blanks can be used. • Event List Set the schedule event in this field. Click the [Add] button. The "Set Event" field is displayed. Up to eight events per schedule can be created. 106 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED P2X0-0700-07ENZ0 Chapter 5 Configuration 5.2 RAID Group Management • When changing the event details, select the target event, and click the [Edit] button. • When deleting the event, select the target event(s) to be deleted (multiple selections can be made), and click the [Delete] button. • Clicking the [Delete All] button deletes all the specified events in the schedule. • Set Event Specify the following items, and click the [Apply] button. - Event Type Select one of the following items: • everyday • Every week • Specific days • Specific week Also, enter a Month (when selecting "Every week" or "Specific week"), Period (when selecting other than "everyday"), and start/end time of the disk activation. 107 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED P2X0-0700-07ENZ0 Chapter 5 Configuration 5.2 RAID Group Management 5 Click the [Set] button. → A confirmation screen appears. 6 Click the [OK] button. → The new Eco-mode schedule setting is started. End of procedure Apply Eco-mode Schedule This function applies the Eco-mode schedule to the RAID group. The procedure to apply the Eco-mode schedule is as follows: Procedure 1 Click the [Set Eco-mode Schedule] under the [RAID Group Management] menu on the [Volume Settings] tab. → The [Set Eco-mode Schedule] screen appears. 2 Click the "RAID Groups" icon from the tree in the left of the screen. → The "Assign RAID Groups" field is displayed. 108 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED P2X0-0700-07ENZ0 Chapter 5 Configuration 5.2 RAID Group Management 3 Specify the following items, and click the [Set] button. • Schedule Name Select the Eco-mode schedule to be applied When disabling the Eco-mode schedule for the relevant RAID group, select "Disable". When external software controls the Eco-mode, "External" is displayed. • Action Select "ON" to enable the Eco-mode schedule specified in "Schedule Name" in the target RAID group. Select "OFF" to disable the Eco-mode schedule. → A confirmation screen appears. 4 Click the [OK] button. → The Eco-mode schedule is applied for the RAID groups. End of procedure 5.2.8 Change CM Ownership The [Change CM Ownership] function changes the assigned CM (CM ownership) specified when creating the RAID group. Normally, CM ownership is automatically allocated. If the load is not balanced evenly between CMs, CM ownership can be manually allocated in order to balance the load. When the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 has only one CM, the assigned CM cannot be changed. 109 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED P2X0-0700-07ENZ0 Chapter 5 Configuration 5.2 RAID Group Management • This function cannot be used in the following conditions: - No RAID groups are registered in the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 - Logical Device Expansion is in progress - Pinned data exists in the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 - RAID migration is in progress - A REC buffer whose usage is not set as "Unused" is registered - RAID group status is other than "Available" - RAID group is blocked - Volumes which are being encrypted exist - Volumes which are being formatted exist • During CM ownership change, the device status is changed from Write Back mode to Write Through mode. Consider the workload when using this function. The procedure to change RAID group assigned CM is as follows: Procedure 1 Click the [Change CM Ownership] under the [RAID Group Management] menu on the [Volume Settings] tab. → The [Change CM Ownership] screen appears. 2 Specify the following items, and click the [Change] button. • Select Automatic or Manual assignment of ownership. Select the method for assigning the CM from "Auto" or "Manual". If changing the current setting, a confirmation screen appears. • RAID Group List When selecting the "Manual" for "Select Automatic or Manual assignment of ownership." field, specify the assigned CM for the RAID group. → A confirmation screen appears. 110 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED P2X0-0700-07ENZ0 Chapter 5 Configuration 5.3 Volume Management 3 Click the [OK] button. → The assigned CM is changed. End of procedure 5.3 Volume Management The following settings are available as the volume management. • Create/Delete Volume • Format Volume • Encrypt Volume • LUN Concatenation • RAID Migration • Initialize Snap Data Volume • Release Reservation • Set Volume Name • Configure LUN Mapping 5.3.1 Create Volume The [Create Volume] function creates the volumes in the existing RAID group. Open or Snap Data Volume (SDV) can be created with this function. After completing the volume creation, the new volumes are formatted automatically. Volumes can be accessed from the host when created in the RAID group and LUN mapped. ● The maximum number of volumes that can be registered The following table shows the maximum number of volumes can be created for each device. Device Type per RAID group per Device ETERNUS DX60 128 512 ETERNUS DX80/DX90 128 1024 111 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED P2X0-0700-07ENZ0 Chapter 5 Configuration 5.3 Volume Management • When the maximum number of volumes has already been created in the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90, more volumes cannot be created. In this case, to create a new volume, first delete volumes using the "5.3.2 Delete Volume" (page 114) function, and then try creating a new volume again. • A volume is allocated to uninterrupted free space in the order of creation. If an area with the necessary capacity cannot be acquired from the free space available, use the "5.3.5 LUN Concatenation" (page 120) function to concatenate multiple spaces into a volume. SDV is the Snap Data Volume that is required for SnapOPC+. Refer to "5.4.2 Manage Copy Session" (page 152) for details about SnapOPC+. The procedure to create a volume is as follows: Procedure 1 Click the [Create Volume] under the [Volume Management] menu on the [Volume Settings] tab. → The [Create Volume] screen appears. 2 Select the RAID group where the volumes are created from the tree in the left of the screen, or RAID Group List. → The detailed information of the selected RAID group is displayed. 112 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED P2X0-0700-07ENZ0 Chapter 5 Configuration 5.3 Volume Management 3 Specify the following items, and click the [Create] button. • Volume Name Specify the volume name. Between 1 and 16 alphanumeric characters, symbols (except ', (comma)' and '?', and '% used as the first letter'), and blanks can be used. • Type Select the volume type (Open or SDV). • Capacity (MB) Specify the volume capacity to be created in units of MB. Set the value between 24 to 8388607 (MB), or the maximum capacity of the RAID group. When creating an SDV, the total SDV capacity (MB) and 0.1% of the copy source volume capacity is secured in the ETERNUS DX60/ DX80/DX90. 0.1% of the copy source volume is the capacity used for the controlling information area in the SDV. • Source Volume Capacity (MB) (SDV only) Specify the total capacity of the copy source for SDV in units of MB. Set the value between 64 to 8388607 (MB). • Encryption Select whether to "Enable" or "Disable" encryption mode for the new volume. An encrypted volume cannot be changed to non-encrypted volumes. Refer to "5.3.4 Encrypt Volume" (page 118) for details. • Number of Volumes When creating multiple volumes of the same type and capacity, set the number of volumes to be created. A created volume name is "specified volume name + running number starting from 0". → A confirmation screen appears. 113 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED P2X0-0700-07ENZ0 Chapter 5 Configuration 5.3 Volume Management 4 Click the [OK] button. → The volumes are created. End of procedure 5.3.2 Delete Volume The [Delete Volume] function deletes the volumes in the RAID group. Make sure to backup any necessary data before proceeding. • The following volumes cannot be deleted. - Volumes that are allocated to a Host Affinity or mapped LUN. - Volumes during RAID migration. - Copy source and destination volumes during Advanced Copy session. • A volume is allocated to uninterrupted free space in order of creation. When a volume is deleted, the space where the volume existed becomes free space. By repeating creation and deletion of volumes, free space may be dispersed in the RAID group. • Up to 128 volumes can be deleted at once. The procedure to delete a volume is as follows: Procedure 1 Click the [Delete Volume] under the [Volume Management] menu on the [Volume Settings] tab. → The [Delete Volume] screen appears. 114 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED P2X0-0700-07ENZ0 Chapter 5 Configuration 5.3 Volume Management 2 Select the volume to be deleted from the "Volume List" field (multiple selections can be made), and click the [Delete] button. → A confirmation screen appears. 3 Click the [OK] button. → The selected volumes are deleted. End of procedure 115 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED P2X0-0700-07ENZ0 Chapter 5 Configuration 5.3 Volume Management 5.3.3 Format Volume The [Format Volume] function is used to format (clear data in) the selected volume. • If selecting and formatting a volume that is in use, the data stored in the volume will be deleted. • For a newly created volume, formatting with this function is not required. Newly created volumes are formatted automatically. • When disk diagnosis or RAID group diagnosis are in progress, this function cannot be performed. • The following volumes cannot be formatted. - Volumes with a status other than "Readying" or "Available" - Volumes in the RAID group during Logical Device Expansion - Volumes for which Advanced Copy is being performed - Volumes during RAID migration • When a volume is being formatted, some settings and functions cannot be performed. • When canceling the volume format, delete the target volume. Progress of formatting can be checked from the [Volume Status] menu on the [Status] tab. The procedure to format a volume is as follows: Procedure 1 Click the [Format Volume] under the [Volume Management] menu on the [Volume Settings] tab. → The [Format Volume] screen appears. 116 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED P2X0-0700-07ENZ0 Chapter 5 Configuration 5.3 Volume Management 2 Select the volume to be formatted from the tree in the left of the screen, or "Volume List" field (multiple selections can be made), and click the [Format] button. → A confirmation screen appears. 3 Click the [OK] button. → The selected volumes are formatted. End of procedure 117 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED P2X0-0700-07ENZ0 Chapter 5 Configuration 5.3 Volume Management 5.3.4 Encrypt Volume The [Encrypt Volume] function encrypts the data in the disks to prevent the data leakage caused by theft or loss when removing disks. • When encrypting volumes, enable the encryption mode using the "6.4.3 Setup Encryption Mode" (page 238) function. However, when the "Setup Encryption Mode" is not displayed in the menu, the encryption function is not available. However, when the encryption function is not available, the "Setup Encryption Mode" is not displayed in the menu. • This function prevents data leakage from removal of disks. Therefore, when accessing from the server, data in the disks is not encrypted. Note that this function cannot prevent data leakage by server access. • Once a volume has been encrypted, it cannot be changed back to a non-encrypted volume. • Canceling volume encryption is not possible. • This function cannot be used under the following conditions: - Encryption mode is not set (refer to "6.4.3 Setup Encryption Mode" (page 238)) - A warning status component exists in the controller enclosure - There is no volume to be encrypted • Volumes in the following conditions cannot be selected as an encryption target volume (not displayed in the Volume List). - Volumes which are not in normal status (Rebuilding/Copybacking, etc.) - Volumes which are being formatted - Volumes in RAID migration operation - Volumes in a RAID group in which Logical Device Expansion is being executed - Volumes which are already encrypted - Volumes which are being encrypted • When encrypting Advanced Copy target volumes, both the copy source and copy destination volumes must be encrypted. • The following performance may be degraded for encrypted volumes compared with non-encrypted volumes. - Access to the encrypted volumes - Copy transfer of encrypted volumes The progress of an encryption operation can be checked from [Volume Status] menu on the [Status] tab screen. 118 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED P2X0-0700-07ENZ0 Chapter 5 Configuration 5.3 Volume Management The procedure to encrypt a volume is as follows: Procedure 1 Click the [Encrypt Volume] under the [Volume Management] menu on the [Volume Settings] tab. → The [Encrypt Volume] screen appears. 2 Select the volume to be encrypted from the "Volume List" field (multiple selections can be made), and click the [Encrypt] button. → A confirmation screen appears. 3 Click the [OK] button. → The selected volume is encrypted. End of procedure 119 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED P2X0-0700-07ENZ0 Chapter 5 Configuration 5.3 Volume Management 5.3.5 LUN Concatenation LUN concatenation adds new space for volumes and expands the volume capacity that can be used from the server. This function enables the use of free area in the RAID group, and solves capacity shortages. This function obtains the area to be used for capacity expansion from unused areas in an existing RAID group. LUN concatenation creates a new volume with the obtained area, and concatenates these volumes to be used as a large capacity volume. Concatenation of multiple free areas from different RAID groups is possible. Also, concatenation is possible even if the RAID levels of the groups are different. Up to 16 volumes can be concatenated. The maximum volume capacity after concatenation is 32TB. ● Conditions of the volumes to be concatenated • • • • • • The volume type must be "Open" (Open volume) The volume status must be "Available" The volume capacity must be 1024MB or larger Cannot be concatenated during RAID Migration Cannot be concatenated when there is an Advanced Copy session The RAID group to which the volume belongs is not in the Logical Device Expansion process ● Conditions of RAID groups to obtain unused area • • • • The RAID Group status must be "Available" A RAID group with less than 128 volumes registered A RAID group must not be blocked The free space in the RAID group must be 1024MB or larger • Concatenation of volumes is not possible in RAID groups configured with disks of different types (SAS/SSD). • When expanding the existing volume capacity using the [LUN Concatenation] function, the server is required to recognize the expanded volume capacity after the concatenation. A new concatenated volume is automatically formatted. The progress of formatting may be checked in the [Volume Status] screen on the [Status] tab. The procedure for LUN Concatenation is as follows: Procedure 1 Click the [LUN Concatenation] under the [Volume Management] menu on the [Volume Settings] tab. → The [LUN Concatenation] screen appears. 120 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED P2X0-0700-07ENZ0 Chapter 5 Configuration 5.3 Volume Management 2 Select the volume to be concatenated from the tree in the left of the screen, or Volume List. → Detailed information of the target volume is displayed. 3 Click the [Next >] button. 121 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED P2X0-0700-07ENZ0 Chapter 5 Configuration 5.3 Volume Management 4 Set the following items, and click the [Concatenation] button. • RAID Group Select the existing RAID group where the concatenation volume is obtained. • Capacity (MB) Specify the capacity of concatenation volume, and click the [Add] button. The capacity of a volume that can be added must be 1024MB or larger. Concatenation volume is added in the "Volume Information" field. → A confirmation screen appears. 5 Click the [OK] button. → LUN concatenation is started. End of procedure 5.3.6 RAID Migration This function migrates a volume in a RAID group to a free area in another RAID group. Setting (expanding) the volume capacity is also available. This function enables load balancing of host access. Creation and format of new volumes and host interface establishment are automatically performed. Because data in the volume will be moved to a new volume, users are allowed to access the data anytime without being affected by the migration. After the RAID migration is completed, the migration source volume is deleted. 122 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED P2X0-0700-07ENZ0 Chapter 5 Configuration 5.3 Volume Management ● Conditions of the migration source volume • • • • • • • • • The volume type must be "Open" (Open volume) The volume status must be "Available" Cannot be migrated while formatting Cannot be migrated during RAID Migration Cannot be migrated during Advanced Copy Cannot be migrated during encryption A concatenated volume cannot be migrated The RAID group to which the volume belongs is not in the Logical Device Expansion process. The total capacity of the Open Volume to be migrated and the capacity of the volumes being migrated must not exceed 8TB ● Conditions of the migration destination RAID group • • • • The number of volumes in the RAID group must be less than 128 The status of the RAID group must be "Available" or "Present" A RAID group must not be blocked The free area (sequential space) for the RAID group must be equal to or larger than the migration source volume capacity • The migration destination is not in the same RAID group as the migration source (migration in the same RAID group is not available) • The RAID group to which the volume belongs is not in the Logical Device Expansion process. ● Conditions of the RAID migration session • Up to 32 RAID migration sessions can be migrated at the same time • Up to 8TB capacity of RAID migration can be executed at the same time ● The maximum number of volumes that can be registered RAID Migration creates a new volume. Refer to table "The maximum number of volumes that can be registered" (page 111) in "5.3.1 Create Volume" (page 111) for the maximum number of volumes that can be created for ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90. The procedure for RAID migration is as follows: Procedure 1 Click the [RAID Migration] under the [Volume Management] menu on the [Volume Settings] tab. → The [RAID Migration] screen appears. 123 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED P2X0-0700-07ENZ0 Chapter 5 Configuration 5.3 Volume Management 2 Select the migration source volume, and click the [Next >] button. → The "Select Destination RAID Group for the migrated Volume" setting field is displayed. 3 Select the migration destination RAID group, and click the [Next >] button. → The "Input Volume Capacity" setting field is displayed. 124 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED P2X0-0700-07ENZ0 Chapter 5 Configuration 5.3 Volume Management 4 Input the new volume capacity (in MB), and click the [Next >] button. Specifying (Expanding) the target volume capacity is available at the RAID migration. Added capacity is created as a new volume in the migration destination RAID group. 5 Click the [Migration] button. → A confirmation screen appears. 125 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED P2X0-0700-07ENZ0 Chapter 5 Configuration 5.3 Volume Management 6 Click the [OK] button. → The RAID migration process is started. If the RAID migration process cannot be continued during the operation, the process is canceled and the RAID migration destination volume is deleted. End of procedure 5.3.7 Initialize Snap Data Volume The [Initialize Snap Data Volume] function initializes the management information for the Snap Data Volume (SDV) that is created as the copy destination for SnapOPC+. When using the SnapOPC+, create the Snap Data Volume as the copy destination from the screen to create a volume. The Snap Data Volume includes the data area and copy management information area. This function is used to initialize the management information for the Snap Data Volume when changing the copy source or canceling the copy. Note that data area will not be initialized (formatted). In the following conditions, the management information for the Snap Data Volume (SDV) cannot be initialized. • When there is no volume to be initialized • When the target volume is not Snap Data Volume • When the target volume status is not "Available" • When the copy session is specified for the target volume • When this function is already in operation in the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/ DX90 The procedure to initialize a Snap Data Volume is as follows: Procedure 1 Click the [Initialize Snap Data Volume] under the [Volume Management] menu on the [Volume Settings] tab. → The [Initialize Snap Data Volume] screen appears. 126 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED P2X0-0700-07ENZ0 Chapter 5 Configuration 5.3 Volume Management 2 Select the Snap Data Volume to be initialized from the tree in the left of the screen, or "Volume List" field. → The detailed information of the selected volume is displayed. 3 Click the [Initialize] button. → A confirmation screen appears. 127 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED P2X0-0700-07ENZ0 Chapter 5 Configuration 5.3 Volume Management 4 Click the [OK] button. → The selected Snap Data Volumes are initialized. End of procedure 5.3.8 Release Reservation Some servers may reserve volumes. A volume in Reserve (Persistent Reserve) status set by the server can be released, and all Reservation Keys can be deleted with GUI. Normally, the server executes Reserve (occupation) and Release (release occupation) of a volume. This function is used only when the server cannot release the volume reservation because of a server failure, etc. Be sure to pay attention when using this function as it may cause data corruption. The procedure to release reservation is as follows: Procedure 1 Click the [Release Reservation] under the [Volume Management] menu on the [Volume Settings] tab. → The [Release Reservation] screen appears. The following items are displayed: - No. The volume number is displayed. - Name The volume name is displayed. - CM Port The CM port to which the volume is LUN mapped is displayed. - Affinity Group When the host affinity function is used, the affinity group to which the volume is LUN mapped is displayed. - LUN The reserved LUN is displayed. When the volume is not reserved, "-" is displayed. - Registrant Count The number of Reservation Keys registered in the volume is displayed. 128 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED P2X0-0700-07ENZ0 Chapter 5 Configuration 5.3 Volume Management - Reservation Type When the volume is in persistent reservation status, one of the following persistent reservation types is displayed. • WE (Write Exclusive) • EA (Exclusive Access) • WE-RO (Write Exclusive-Registrants Only) • EA-RO (Exclusive Access-Registrants Only) • WE-AR (Write Exclusive-All Registrants) • EA-AR (Exclusive Access-All Registrants) When the volume is in reservation status other than persistent reservation status, "" is displayed. - Reservation Status The volume reservation status is displayed. "Yes": In persistent reservation status "No": In reservation status, but not in persistent reservation status "-": Only the reservation key is registered (not reserved) - APTPL Whether or not persistent reservation information is kept after the ETERNUS DX60/ DX80/DX90 has been shutdown/rebooted is displayed. "Yes": The persistent reservation information is kept. "No": The persistent reservation information is not kept. When the volume is in reservation status other than persistent reservation status, "No" is displayed. 2 Select the volumes to release the reservation (multiple selections can be made), and click the [Release] button. Clicking the [Reset] button clears selections for all volumes. → A confirmation screen appears. 129 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED P2X0-0700-07ENZ0 Chapter 5 Configuration 5.3 Volume Management 3 Click the [OK] button. → The reservation status for the selected volume is released. End of procedure 5.3.9 Set Volume Name The [Set Volume Name] function changes the volume name. The procedure to set volume name is as follows: Procedure 1 Click the [Set Volume Name] under the [Volume Management] menu on the [Volume Settings] tab. → The [Set Volume Name] screen appears. 2 Select the volume to change the volume name from the tree in the left of the screen, or "Volume List" field. → The "Set Volume Name" field is displayed. 130 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED P2X0-0700-07ENZ0 Chapter 5 Configuration 5.3 Volume Management 3 Specify the following items, and click the [Set] button. • Current Volume Name The current volume name is displayed. • New Volume Name Specify a new volume name. Between 1 and 16 alphanumeric characters, symbols (except ', (comma)' and '?', and '% used as the first letter'), and blanks can be used. Volume name that is already registered in the ETERNUS DX60/ DX80/DX90 cannot be specified. → A confirmation screen appears. 4 Click the [OK] button. → The volume name is changed. End of procedure 5.3.10 Configure LUN Mapping The [Configure LUN Mapping] function sets the relationship between a Logical Unit Number (LUN) and volume number. LUN mapping enables the server access to the volumes in the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90. 131 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED P2X0-0700-07ENZ0 Chapter 5 Configuration 5.3 Volume Management ● Maximum number of LUNs that can be accessed Note that the number of LUNs that can be accessed varies depending on the host specific mode of host response that is set for the server. The following table shows the maximum number of LUN mappings that can be set. Host specific mode of host response ETERNUS DX60 ETERNUS DX80/DX90 Normal (other than HP-UX mode) 256 256 HP-UX mode 512 1024 • When changing or deleting LUN mapping during operation, stop access from the server allocated to the target port. • To add new LUN mapping, it is not necessary to stop the host access. • Mapping to a "Work Volume" during RAID Migration is not allowed. • When no volume is defined, this function cannot be used. • Host affinity functions cannot be used in the following conditions: - When no affinity group is registered - When there is no port for which host affinity is enabled - When no server is registered to a port for which host affinity is enabled • Host affinity group that is allocated to the server cannot be deleted. • Up to 1024 LUNs can be mapped by connecting two affinity groups. Servers can access 1024 LUNs only when the host specific mode of the Host Response is "HP-UX mode". Note this when allocating the server and the Affinity Group. When using the Host Affinity function This section describes the following settings: • LUN Mapping • Affinity Group • Port connected to the server • Specific information (HBA) for the server to access the affinity group This function creates an "affinity group", a combination of volumes and LUN (multiple groups may be created), and allocates them to each server. The procedure to set LUN mapping when using the Host Affinity function is as follows: Procedure 1 Click the [Configure LUN Mapping] under the [Volume Management] menu on the [Volume Settings] tab. → The [Configure LUN Mapping] screen appears. 2 Click the "Affinity Group" icon on the left of the screen. 132 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED P2X0-0700-07ENZ0 Chapter 5 Configuration 5.3 Volume Management 3 Click the [Create] button. → The "Affinity Group Setting" and "Define LUN Mapping" fields are displayed. 4 Set the affinity group name, and volume number to be corresponded to the LUN, and click the [Set] button. Specify the affinity group name. Between 1 and 16 alphanumeric characters, symbols (except ', (comma)' and '?', and '% used as the first letter'), and blanks can be used. A LUN is displayed as a decimal number. Set the volume number as a decimal number. • Clicking the [Specify Range] button displays a screen for specifying the LUN mapping range. In this screen, LUN ranges can be set (numbers) and corresponding volumes are available. • Clicking the [Clear] button clears all the volume numbers. → A confirmation screen appears. 133 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED P2X0-0700-07ENZ0 Chapter 5 Configuration 5.3 Volume Management 5 Click the [OK] button. → The new affinity group is created. Go on to the next setting to allocate affinity group to the server. Repeat Step 1 through Step 5 to set more affinity groups. 6 Click the [Configure LUN Mapping] under the [Volume Management] menu on the [Volume Settings] tab. → The [Configure LUN Mapping] screen appears. 7 Click the "Ports" icon on the left of the screen. 8 Select the port to be connected to the server from the tree in the left of the screen or Port List. Select a port in which "Host Affinity" is "Enable". → Detailed information of the selected port is displayed. 134 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED P2X0-0700-07ENZ0 Chapter 5 Configuration 5.3 Volume Management 9 Click the [Edit] button. → The "Host Affinity Setting" field is displayed. 10 Allocate the affinity group to the server, and click the [Set] button. Clicking the [Clear] button changes all the allocated affinity groups to "Disable" → A confirmation screen appears. 135 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED P2X0-0700-07ENZ0 Chapter 5 Configuration 5.3 Volume Management 11 Click the [OK] button. → The host affinity setting is executed. LUN mapping configuration when using an affinity group completes. When changing or deleting the an affinity group, select the target affinity group from the tree in the left of screen or target affinity group listed in the "Affinity Group List" field, and click the [Edit] or [Delete] button. End of procedure When the Host Affinity function is not used This section describes the following settings: • LUN Mapping • Port connected to the server This function specifies the Host LUN allocation to the volume for each port. The procedure to configure LUN Mapping when the Host Affinity function is not used is as follows: Procedure 1 Click the [Configure LUN Mapping] under the [Volume Management] menu on the [Volume Settings] tab. → The [Configure LUN Mapping] screen appears. 2 Click the "Ports" icon on the left of the screen. 136 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED P2X0-0700-07ENZ0 Chapter 5 Configuration 5.3 Volume Management 3 Select the target port from the tree in the left of the screen, or Port List. Select a port in which "Host Affinity" is "Disable". → Detailed information of the selected port is displayed. 4 Click the [Edit] button. → The "Define LUN Mapping" field is displayed. 137 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED P2X0-0700-07ENZ0 Chapter 5 Configuration 5.3 Volume Management 5 Change the LUN Mapping information for the target port, and click the [Set] button. Set the volume number or volume name to be corresponded to the LUN. The LUN is displayed as a decimal number. Set the volume number as a decimal number. Set the volume name between 1 and 16 alphanumeric characters, symbols (except ', (comma)' and '?', and '% used as the first letter'). • Clicking the [Specify Range] button displays the screen to specify the LUN mapping in range. In this screen, setting range of LUNs (numbers) and corresponding volumes is available. • Clicking the [Clear] button clears all the volume numbers. • When deleting the LUN mapping information for the target port, clear all the volume numbers corresponding to the LUN, and click the [Set] button. → A confirmation screen appears. 6 Click the [OK] button. → LUN mapping configuration when an affinity group is not used completes. End of procedure 138 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED P2X0-0700-07ENZ0 Chapter 5 Configuration 5.4 Advanced Copy Management 5.4 Advanced Copy Management Advanced Copy Management provides the following functions. • Setup Snap Data Pool • Manage Copy Session • Register Copy License • Modify Copy Parameters • Modify EC/OPC Priority • Modify Copy Table Size • Set Copy Path • Modify Port Mode (*1) • Modify REC Multiplicity (*1) • Modify REC Buffer (*1) *1: This function is available when using the ETERNUS DX90. ■ Advanced Copy function Advanced Copy is a function used to quickly copy data (volume) to another volume in the same device, at any given point in time. By using the copy destination volume, it is possible to backup data without suspending operations. The copy function of ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 can be used by the following methods: • Copy in units of volumes using GUI or CLI command • Obtaining snapshots of volumes by using the Windows Volume Shadow Copy Service (VSS) function • Obtaining backup and replication that is associated with operation by using the ETERNUS SF AdvancedCopy Manager (ACM) The copy function of ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 creates a snapshot of the selected volume. Copy usage (such as backup and replication) and the procedure for copy vary depending on the OS and software to be used. Refer to the manuals for each OS and software for details. ■ Type of Advanced Copy Equivalent Copy (EC) function (*2) and One Point Copy (OPC) function (*3) are the available Advanced Copy functions. • EC EC is used when copying large volumes, or when processing time can be estimated easily. • OPC OPC is used when it is difficult to estimate the backup time. *2: *3: In this manual, "EC function" indicates EC and Remote Equivalent Copy (REC). In this manual, "OPC function" indicates OPC, QuickOPC, and SnapOPC+. GUI provides various settings and status displays for the Advanced Copy function. However, only SnapOPC+ sessions can be created using GUI. 139 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED P2X0-0700-07ENZ0 Chapter 5 Configuration 5.4 Advanced Copy Management Each function is described below. ● EC (Mirror Breaking method) EC makes a mirror copy of the copy source to the copy destination beforehand and then keeping it up to date while it is needed, at which time the mirror relationship is "broken" to reveal the desired copy. The updated data in the copy source will be reflected to the copy destination volume after completing the operation. After mirror is established, all writes are also duplicated. Copy Source Copy volumes as seen by the server Copy Destination Logical copy (*4) Actual state of volumes in the disk storage system Mirror may be broken as and when required. *4: After mirror is established, all writes are also duplicated. Also, for ETERNUS DX90, the following function is available. ● REC EC among different devices on the site is called REC. REC is different from EC, EC performs Advanced Copy within the same device, whereas REC copies data between different devices. Advanced Copy between different devices is called Remote Advanced Copy. Remote Advanced Copy can be used to replicate data for making backups and for testing. Note that REC uses the same copy method as EC. ETERNUS DX90 Copy source ETERNUS DX90 FC-RA FC-RA FC-RA FC-RA Copy destination REC is available when using an ETERNUS DX90. Before using REC, change the FC host port mode to Remote Adapter (RA) using the procedure described in "5.4.8 Modify Port Mode" (page 184). 140 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED P2X0-0700-07ENZ0 Chapter 5 Configuration 5.4 Advanced Copy Management By creating a REC connection to an off-site device using network lines, IP lines and fiber optical lines, for data transfer, REC can be performed between remote locations. Remote Advanced Copy between distant locations is called Extended Remote Advanced Copy. It can be used as a data maintenance solution for disaster recovery. ETERNUS DX90 Copy source ETERNUS DX90 FC-RA FC-RA Copy destination Network line FC-RA FC-RA FC-IP Converter FC-IP Converter REC has two transmission modes, asynchronous transmission mode and synchronous transmission mode. Which mode is selected should be based on the line type and the influence on access to the transaction volumes: - Synchronous transmission mode The write completion signal for a write request by the server is only returned after the write to the copy source and the copy write to the copy destination have both completed. However, synchronizing the data copy with the copy source write guarantees the contents of the copy source and copy destination at the time of completion. This method has a significant effect on write accesses from the server, and so is only recommended for device-to-device copies between sites where the communications lag is small. - Asynchronous transmission mode Write completion signals to write requests from the server are returned as soon as the write to the copy source has been done, without waiting for the data to be copied to the copy destination. Copying the data to the copy destination asynchronously with the write allows the copy to be performed without affecting the write performance of the server/copy source pair. This method is recommended for device-to-device copies between devices at remote sites. This method is used for remote disaster backups. Asynchronous mode has two sub-modes, Stack mode and Consistency mode. Which should be selected will depend on the pattern of usage. There is also a Through mode that is used to finalize data transfer for the other two modes. • Stack mode Only updated block positions are recorded before returning the completion signal to the server, so waiting-for-response effects on the server are small. Actual transfer of the recorded blocks can be performed by an independent transfer engine. This mode is mainly used for remote backup. This mode can be used even when the available line bandwidth is small, but a large amount of untransferred data can accumulate as a result. 141 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED P2X0-0700-07ENZ0 Chapter 5 Configuration 5.4 Advanced Copy Management • Consistency mode This mode guarantees the sequential transmission of updates to the destination device in the same order as the writes occurred. This is useful when mirroring databases and copies of multiple connected areas. This mode uses a part of the cache memory as a transfer buffer. The blocks being copied are "saved" into a send buffer and then transferred to the receive buffer, from which they are then "extracted". When using the Concurrent Suspend function, the transfer mode does not need to be changed to the Through mode. • Through mode This mode is not used for normal transfers, but rather to transfer all as-yetuntransferred data when stopping or suspending the Consistency mode or Stack mode. ● OPC (Background Copy method) The OPC function logically copies all data from the copy source to the copy destination in the same device, when the host requests the operation. The ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 immediately returns an OPC completion response to the copy request. This function then allows prompt access to both the original and copied data while the actual physical copying proceeds in the background. Unlike EC, the updated data in the copy source will not be reflected to the copy destination volume after completing the operation. Copy Source Copy volumes as seen by the server Copy Destination Logical copy Actual state of volumes in the disk storage system Background copy 142 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED P2X0-0700-07ENZ0 Chapter 5 Configuration 5.4 Advanced Copy Management The following functions relating to the OPC are also available. ● QuickOPC Just as for OPC, QuickOPC copies all the data in the copy source volume at the initialphysical copy. After the initial-physical copy has completed, only updated data needs to be copied hereafter. Because it reduces the copy volume and realizes high-speed backup, QuickOPC is recommended for backing up a large-scale database. Copy Source Copy Destination Logical copy Copy volumes as seen by the server Only updated data is copied Actual state of volumes in the disk storage system Background copy ● SnapOPC+ SnapOPC+ manages data by allocating OPC data and sessions that form generations, and copies updated data only to the latest generation. SnapOPC+ manages generations of differences between updated data as modification history. It enables copying to be performed with less physical capacity. Maximum number of generations varies depending on the ETERNUS models and software. SnapOPC+ is recommended for backing up less updated volumes such as the file server. Copy Source Copy volumes as seen by the server Copy Destination Logical Copy (*5) Original data is copied before being overwritten. Actual state of volumes in the disk storage system Up to 8 generations can be copied. *5: Original data is referenced when an uncopied area is read. 143 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED P2X0-0700-07ENZ0 Chapter 5 Configuration 5.4 Advanced Copy Management SnapOPC+ uses the unique volume (Snap Data Volume: SDV) as a copy destination. Also, a setting pool area for SDV (Snap Data Pool Volume), to continue the copy session even when the amount of update data exceeds the SDV capacity, is available. - SDV (Snap Data Volume) SDV is an area used as a copy destination for SnapOPC+. Only one copy destination can be specified per SDV. Refer to "5.3.1 Create Volume" (page 111) for detailed procedure to create SDV. - SDP (Snap Data Pool) SDP is a standby storage area to continue sessions even when the amount of update data exceeds the SDV capacity. It enables the storage area to be supplied from SDP to SDV as required. This continues the copy session even when the amount of update data exceeds the SDV capacity. Note that SDP is configured by a unique volume Snap Data Pool Volume (SDPV). Creating SDPV enables SDP. - SDPV (Snap Data Pool Volume) SDPV is a unique volume for SDP. Created SDPV is automatically added to the SDP. - SDPE (Snap Data Pool Element) SDPE is a unit of SDP that is managed in the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90. Once the copy destination SDV capacity runs out, SDPEs are supplied from SDP to SDV and the storage area is automatically expanded. Supplied storage (SDPE) returns to SDP after the copy session complete. Note that SDPE capacity is fixed to 1GB. Copy source Copy destination Seen by server to have the same capacity as the original volume. Logical copy In actuality, only the changes to original data are copied and kept. SDP SDV SDPE SDPE SnapOPC+ Extra storage areas (SDPE) are supplied as the available SDV capacity for the copy destination runs out. SDPE supplied to the SDV are returned to the SDP after the copy session has been deleted.(*6) *6: After the ETERNUS SF AdvancedCopy Manager (ACM) completes the session instead of a user, another SnapOPC+ copy session may be created. The ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 returns the SDPE when accepting a SnapOPC+ session deletion request. 144 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED P2X0-0700-07ENZ0 Chapter 5 Configuration 5.4 Advanced Copy Management ■ Preparations for the Advanced Copy function This section describes how to prepare for using the Advanced Copy function and copy session management. ● Advanced preparation The following preparations are required when using Advanced Copy functions. - License registration Register a license for using the Advanced Copy function. If a license is not registered, up to eight copy sessions can be performed. When an Advanced Copy feature is purchased, refer to "5.4.3 Register Copy License" (page 155) to register the license. - Copy destination volume creation Create a physical volume according to the amount of updated data in the copy source volume. When performing SnapOPC+, create SDV and SDP. Refer to "5.3.1 Create Volume" (page 111) and "5.4.1 Setup Snap Data Pool" (page 146) for details. • The RAID configuration of the copy source and copy destination can be different. • The copy source and copy destination volume encryption status must match. - Copy table size setting Set the copy table size depending on the capacity of the copy target volume. Refer to "5.4.6 Modify Copy Table Size" (page 160). - Copy priority setting Specify the copy priority in the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90. Refer to "5.4.5 Modify EC/OPC Priority" (page 158). When performing SnapOPC+, the following preparations are also required. - Copy parameter setting Specify the threshold to report the shortage of SDP volume capacity during the copy operation. Refer to "5.4.4 Modify Copy Parameters" (page 156). When performing REC, the following preparations are also required. - Port mode setting Specify a threshold for notification when a shortage of SDP volume capacity occurs during the copy operation. Refer to "5.4.8 Modify Port Mode" (page 184). - Copy path setting Set the Copy path information between devices. Refer to "5.4.7 Set Copy Path" (page 164). - REC buffer setting Set the transfer buffer setting when performing REC in asynchronous consistency mode. Refer to "5.4.10 Modify REC Buffer" (page 188). 145 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED P2X0-0700-07ENZ0 Chapter 5 Configuration 5.4 Advanced Copy Management - REC multiplicity setting Set the multiplicity used for performing REC. This setting is required when the connection type in the [Set Copy Path] is "Remote". Refer to "5.4.9 Modify REC Multiplicity" (page 186). ● Copy session management After preparation for Advanced Copy is complete, create a copy session to start copying volumes. During operation, check the status of the copy sessions and delete unnecessary copy sessions. - Copy session creation Create a copy session via Windows Volume Shadow Copy Service (VSS) / ETERNUS SF AdvancedCopy Manager (ACM). Note that GUI can create SnapOPC+ session only. Refer to "5.4.2 Manage Copy Session" (page 152). GUI cannot create copy sessions other than SnapOPC+ sessions. Create copy sessions via VSS/ACM. - Copy session check Check the status of each copy session using the [Advanced Copy Status] screen. Refer to "4.4 Advanced Copy Status" (page 61). For REC sessions, checking copy path and buffer status are also available. Refer to "4.5 Advanced Copy Path Status" (page 63) and "4.6 REC Buffer Status" (page 65). - Copy session deletion Delete unnecessary copy sessions. Data in the copy destination volume loses its meaning (becomes undefined). For SnapOPC+, SDPs used by the deleted copy sessions are released. Refer to "5.4.2 Manage Copy Session" (page 152). In principle, use GUI to delete copy sessions created in GUI. Deleting copy sessions created by software other than GUI, such as Windows Volume Shadow Copy Service (VSS) and ETERNUS SF AdvancedCopy Manager (ACM), is not allowed. However, if deleting from VSS/ACM cannot be performed, use GUI to delete copy sessions. 5.4.1 Setup Snap Data Pool This section describes how to set a Snap Data Pool (SDP), the pool area for SDV. Create SDPV This function creates the SDPV in the registered RAID group. When the SDPV creation process is completed, the SDPV will be formatted automatically. The following conditions apply for SDPV creation. ● Condition of SDPV The SDPV capacity must be 2TB or less 146 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED P2X0-0700-07ENZ0 Chapter 5 Configuration 5.4 Advanced Copy Management ● Conditions of the RAID group to create SDPV • The status of the RAID group must be "Available" or "Present" • If volumes are created in the RAID group, the number of volumes in the RAID group must be less than 128 • The free area for the RAID group must be equal or larger than 1GB • The RAID group must not be blocked • The RAID group must not be in the Logical Device Expansion process ● The maximum number of SDPVs that can be set The maximum number of SDPVs for ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 is shown below. Device name per RAID group per device ETERNUS DX60 128 512 ETERNUS DX80/DX90 128 1024 • If the encryption mode is disabled, encrypted SDPV cannot be created. • The following functions cannot be used for SDPV: - Host Affinity settings - LUN mapping - Volume Encryption - LUN Concatenation - RAID Migration • This function cannot be used in the following conditions: - No RAID groups are registered in the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 - When no SDPV is created in the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90, and the RAID group is in the following conditions: • Only one RAID group is registered in the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/ DX90, and Logical Device Expansion is in progress in the RAID group • The status of all the RAID groups is not "Available", or "Present" - When no SDPV is created in the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90, and the maximum number of volumes for each model is already registered. 147 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED P2X0-0700-07ENZ0 Chapter 5 Configuration 5.4 Advanced Copy Management • Unlike other volumes, SDPV cannot be created by "5.3.1 Create Volume" (page 111) menu or deleted by "5.3.2 Delete Volume" (page 114) menu. • While SDPV can be created in any level RAID group, it is recommended that the same RAID group configuration be used for all SDPVs created. • The maximum capacity of SDP is 32TB for ETERNUS DX60, and 64TB for ETERNUS DX80/DX90. • Allocated space (SDPE) to SDV from the SDPV is released in the following conditions: - When deleting the SnapOPC+ session: If one SnapOPC+ session is deleted, all the SnapOPC+ sessions started earlier than that session are also deleted. The space used in the SDV for the stopped generation is released. - When the SnapOPC+ session turns to "Error" status: If one SnapOPC+ session status turns to Error, the status for all the SnapOPC+ sessions started earlier than that session also change to Error. The space used in the SDV for the generation in Error status is released. The procedure to create SDPV is as follows: Procedure 1 Click the [Setup Snap Data Pool] under the [Advanced Copy Management] menu on the [Volume Settings] tab. → The [Setup Snap Data Pool] screen appears. 2 Click the [Create] button. 148 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED P2X0-0700-07ENZ0 Chapter 5 Configuration 5.4 Advanced Copy Management 3 Select the target RAID group icon in the tree on the left of the screen or RAID Group List where the SDPV is created. → The detailed information of the selected RAID group is displayed. 4 Specify the following items, and click the [Create] button. • Volume Name Specify the SDPV name. Between 1 and 16 alphanumeric characters, symbols (except ', (comma)' and '?', and '% used as the first letter'), and blanks can be used. • Type The volume type (SDPV) is displayed. • Capacity (GB) Specify the SDPV capacity. • Encryption Select "Enable" or "Disable" the encryption mode for the new volume. • Number of Volumes When creating multiple volumes with the same type and capacity, enter the number of volumes to be created. Created volume name is "specified volume name + running number starting from 0". 149 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED P2X0-0700-07ENZ0 Chapter 5 Configuration 5.4 Advanced Copy Management → A confirmation screen appears. 5 Click the [OK] button. → Snap Data Pool setting is started. The SDPV is created in the selected RAID group. After SDPV is created, new volume is automatically formatted. End of procedure Delete SDPV This function deletes the registered SDPV. There are two methods for deletion: "Reserve Delete" and "Force Delete". • Reserve Delete If the target SDPV is being used, the SDPV is scheduled for deletion. SDPV that is scheduled for deletion will be deleted after the Advanced Copy session completes (when the usage of SDPV becomes "0"). • Force Delete The selected SDPV is forcibly deleted even if the copy session is under progress. However, SDPV that is scheduled for deletion cannot be deleted. Wait for the scheduled deletion to occur. Up to 128 SDPVs can be deleted at the same time. 150 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED P2X0-0700-07ENZ0 Chapter 5 Configuration 5.4 Advanced Copy Management The procedure to delete SDPV is as follows: Procedure 1 Click the [Setup Snap Data Pool] under the [Advanced Copy Management] menu on the [Volume Settings] tab. → The [Setup Snap Data Pool] screen appears. 2 Select the target SDPV from the tree on the left of the screen or "SDPV List" field, and click the [Reserve Delete] button or [Force Delete] button. 3 Click the [OK] button. → The selected SDPV is deleted. End of procedure 151 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED P2X0-0700-07ENZ0 Chapter 5 Configuration 5.4 Advanced Copy Management 5.4.2 Manage Copy Session The [Manage Copy Session] function creates and deletes the Advanced Copy session. Only the SnapOPC+ copy sessions can be created using GUI. For creating EC, REC, OPC, QuickOPC sessions, use copy management software for the server. Create Copy Session The procedure to create copy session is as follows: Procedure 1 Click the [Manage Copy Session] under the [Advanced Copy Management] menu on the [Volume Settings] tab. → The [Manage Copy Session] screen appears. The Advanced Copy session list is displayed. 2 Click the [Start New Session] button. 152 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED P2X0-0700-07ENZ0 Chapter 5 Configuration 5.4 Advanced Copy Management 3 Select the copy source volume and copy destination volume, and click the [Start New SnapOPC+ Session] button. → A confirmation screen appears. 4 Click the [OK] button. → The created Advanced Copy session is started. End of procedure Delete Copy Session The procedure to delete copy session is as follows: Procedure 1 Click the [Manage Copy Session] under the [Advanced Copy Management] menu on the [Volume Settings] tab. → The [Manage Copy Session] screen appears. The list of Advanced Copy session registered in the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 is displayed. 153 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED P2X0-0700-07ENZ0 Chapter 5 Configuration 5.4 Advanced Copy Management 2 Select the copy session to be deleted from the "Advanced Copy Session List", and click the [Stop Session] button. → A confirmation screen appears. 3 Click the [OK] button. → The selected Advanced Copy session is deleted. End of procedure 154 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED P2X0-0700-07ENZ0 Chapter 5 Configuration 5.4 Advanced Copy Management 5.4.3 Register Copy License The [Register Copy License] function is used to register an Advanced Copy license. The procedure to register a copy license is as follows: Procedure 1 Click the [Register Copy License] under the [Advanced Copy Management] menu on the [Volume Settings] tab. → The [Register Copy License] screen appears. 2 Input the license key, and click the [Register Copy License] button. → A confirmation screen appears. 3 Click the [OK] button. → The Advanced Copy License is registered. End of procedure 155 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED P2X0-0700-07ENZ0 Chapter 5 Configuration 5.4 Advanced Copy Management 5.4.4 Modify Copy Parameters The [Modify Copy Parameters] function sets the parameters to enable automatic reporting and processing when a SDP capacity shortage occurs during the SnapOPC+ operation. If the copy source data exceeds the physical capacity of copy destination (and when the free SDP does not exist), an error occurs in the relevant copy session and other older copy sessions. This function prevents stopping copy session when the capacity shortage occurs. There are two methods for notification; E-mail and SNMP Trap. ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 reports the notification using the method specified in the [Setup Event Notification] screen. Select whether to notify when a SDP capacity shortage occurs. When notifying, select the notification method in advance. The procedure to modify copy parameters is as follows: Procedure 1 Click the [Modify Copy Parameters] under the [Advanced Copy Management] menu on the [Volume Settings] tab. → The [Modify Copy Parameters] screen appears. 2 Specify the following items, and click the [Set] button. Select the threshold for SDP usage ratio. The magnitude relation for each value must be in the following order: Threshold for Policy Level 1 < Threshold for Policy Level 2 < Threshold for Policy Level 3 • Policy Level 1 (Informational) of Snap Data Pool - Threshold (%) Specify the usage ratio of SDP between 1 and 97. If the copy source data exceeds the specified value, the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/ DX90 notifies that effect. • Policy Level 2 (Warning) of Snap Data Pool - Threshold (%) Specify the usage ratio of SDP between 2 and 98. If the copy source data exceeds the specified value, the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/ DX90 notifies that effect. • Policy Level 3 (Error) of Snap Data Pool - Threshold (%) Specify the usage ratio of SDP between 3 and 99. If the copy source data exceeds the specified value, the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/ DX90 notifies that effect. 156 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED P2X0-0700-07ENZ0 Chapter 5 Configuration 5.4 Advanced Copy Management • When reporting automatically if the threshold is exceeded, set the notification method using the method specified in the "6.4.7 Setup Event Notification" (page 245) in advance. • Notification of the shortage of SDP capacity is sent only once for each policy level. Even if the threshold is satisfied again within the 24 hours from the first notification, the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/ DX90 does not report that effect. After 24 hours has passed, the device sends a notification again. • If the threshold for multiple policies is satisfied at the same time, the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 notifies of the highest policy level. → A confirmation screen appears. 3 Click the [OK] button. → The specified copy parameters are registered. End of procedure 157 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED P2X0-0700-07ENZ0 Chapter 5 Configuration 5.4 Advanced Copy Management 5.4.5 Modify EC/OPC Priority The [Modify EC/OPC Priority] function is used to set the copy speed when using EC (EC and REC(*1)) and OPC (OPC, QuickOPC, and SnapOPC+). The EC/OPC speed is usually set in consideration of the host's I/O load and copy processing load. The set speed of EC/OPC becomes effective when the next session starts. Select the EC/OPC priority from the following: • Automatic Priority This mode changes the EC/OPC priority automatically in response to the operating load status. • High Priority This mode operates by making maximum use of internal resources. This mode greatly affects host access performance, thus should not be used during normal operation. Use when the operation load is low. • Low Priority This is a mode in which the influence on host access is reduced to a minimum. Set this mode when using EC and/or OPC during operation. *1: The REC priority is specified using the [Modify REC Multiplicity] function, however, setting values specified here are available in the following conditions: • When the connection type is "Direct" • When the REC multiplicity is not specified Refer to "5.4.7 Set Copy Path" (page 164) for connection type settings. Refer to "5.4.9 Modify REC Multiplicity" (page 186) for REC multiplicity settings. The procedure to modify EC/OPC priority is as follows: Procedure 1 Click the [Modify EC/OPC Priority] under the [Advanced Copy Management] menu on the [Volume Settings] tab. → The [Modify EC/OPC Priority] screen appears. 158 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED P2X0-0700-07ENZ0 Chapter 5 Configuration 5.4 Advanced Copy Management 2 Specify the following item, and click the [Set] button. • EC/OPC Priority Select the EC/OPC speed from "Automatic Priority", "High Priority", or "Low Priority". → A confirmation screen appears. 3 Click the [OK] button. → The selected EC/OPC priority is set. End of procedure 159 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED P2X0-0700-07ENZ0 Chapter 5 Configuration 5.4 Advanced Copy Management 5.4.6 Modify Copy Table Size The [Modify Copy Table Size] function is used to set the control table size on the CM cache memory installed in the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90, which is used by the device firmware. When an EC (EC or REC), or OPC (OPC, QuickOPC, or SnapOPC+) function is in use, this control table (hereafter: copy table) is used as the bitmap area that manages the progress of the copy. Changed settings will be effective when the next session is started. • When the copy table size is equal to 0MB, copy functions cannot be used. Note that the initial (factory default) copy table size setting is 0MB. • Make sure to stop the copy session before reducing the copy table size. • The copy session status can be checked from the [Advanced Copy Status] screen on the [Status] tab. Copy table size (table size) and resolution vary according to the copy capacity and number of sessions that are operated at the same time. (1) Resolution This value determines the amount of data each bit in the copy bitmap represents. The allowed resolution settings of "1 (standard)", "2", "4", "8", and "16" respectively give 8KB, 16KB, 32KB, 64KB, and 128KB regions of data per bitmap bit. The same value is used for all the copy sessions in the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90. The resolution should be set as small as possible to reduce the internal process overhead. Set "1" if possible. (2) Copy Table Size A dedicated memory area is required for Advanced Copy management and is allocated as a table size. The table size and resolution settings are determined by the copy capacity and the number of sessions (volumes) that will be run simultaneously. The following shows the table sizing formula. S (Table size) [MB] = S1 (EC/REC table size) [MB] + S2 (OPC table size without OPC Restoration) [MB] + S3 (OPC table size with OPC Restoration) [MB] + S4 (QuickOPC table size without OPC Restoration) [MB] + S5 (QuickOPC table size with OPC Restoration) [MB] + S6 (SnapOPC+ table size) [MB] 160 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED P2X0-0700-07ENZ0 Chapter 5 Configuration 5.4 Advanced Copy Management • Round the derived value up to the next multiple of 8 to obtain the correct setting for the copy table size. • A copy table of the appropriate size (as derived above) is created in each controller (CM0/CM1). • If the total table size value (S) exceeds the maximum size allowed, adjust the resolution (M) upward until the maximum table size is no longer exceeded. The resolution should be kept as small as possible. • Maximum allowed table sizes are as follows: ETERNUS DX60: 64MB ETERNUS DX80/DX90: 128MB • Allowance should be made for possible future increases in the copy capacity when calculating the EC/OPC/QuickOPC/SnapOPC+ table size. • If the resolution is changed during an existing copy session, the table sizing formula described in this section is not applied. • The same bitmap ratio (M) value must be used by both the copy source device and copy destination device. If the bitmap ratio settings for the copy source and copy destination devices are different, REC cannot be performed. Note that the table sizes (S) do not need to be identical. When different recommended bitmap ratios are calculated for of the copy source and copy destination devices, use whichever bitmap ratio is larger for both devices, recalculating the table size setting for the device whose original bitmap ratio was lower. ● EC/REC table size (S1) M: Resolution C1: EC/REC copy capacity [GB](*1) N1: Number of EC/REC sessions S1 [MB] = ((2 × C1 / M) + N1) × 8 [KB] / 1024 (counting fractions as one) ● OPC table size without OPC Restoration (S2) M: Resolution C2: Copy capacity for OPC where OPC is not used for OPC Restoration [GB](*1) N2: Number of OPC sessions where OPC is not used for OPC Restoration S2 [MB] = ((2 × C2 / M) + N2) × 8 [KB] / 1024 (counting fractions as one) ● OPC table size with OPC Restoration (S3) M: Resolution C3: Copy capacity for OPC where OPC is used for OPC Restoration [GB](*1) N3: Number of OPC sessions where OPC is used for OPC Restoration S3 [MB] = ((2 × C3 / M) + N3) × 2 × 8 [KB] / 1024 (counting fractions as one) 161 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED P2X0-0700-07ENZ0 Chapter 5 Configuration 5.4 Advanced Copy Management ● QuickOPC table size without OPC Restoration (S4) M: Resolution C4: Copy capacity for QuickOPC where QuickOPC is not used for OPC Restoration [GB](*1) N4: Number of QuickOPC sessions where QuickOPC is not used for OPC Restoration S4 [MB] = ((2 × C4 / M) + N4) × 2 × 8 [KB] / 1024 (counting fractions as one) ● QuickOPC table size with OPC Restoration (S5) M: Resolution C5: Copy capacity for QuickOPC where QuickOPC is used for OPC Restoration [GB](*1) N5: Number of QuickOPC sessions where QuickOPC is used for OPC Restoration S5 [MB] = ((2 × C5 / M) + N5) × 3 × 8 [KB] / 1024 (counting fractions as one) ● SnapOPC+ table size (S6) M: Resolution C6: Copy capacity for SnapOPC+ [GB](*2) N6: Number of SnapOPC+ sessions(*3) S6 [MB] = ((2 × C6 / M) + N6) × 8 [KB] / 1024 (counting fractions as one) *1: For EC, OPC, QuickOPC, and REC copy sources, the copy capacity is the total capacity of all volumes (slices or partitions) in the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 that are defined as copy sources. For REC copy destinations, the copy capacity is the total capacity of all the volumes (slices or partitions) in the ETERNUS DX90 that are defined as copy destinations. For multi-copy sessions, the copy capacity is the total capacity of multi-copy source volumes (slices or partitions), multiplied by the number of multi-copy destinations for each copy source. [Example] Calculating capacity of multi-copy sessions: Copy area in the copy source volume A: 200MB, Number of multi-copy destination: 4 Copy area in the copy source volume B: 500MB, Number of multi-copy destination: 8 B A 200 × 4 + 500 × 8 = 4800MB. Add this 4,800MB to the copy capacity C1, C2, or C4, depending on the copy type. (For EC and REC, add the value to C1. For OPC, add the value to C2. For QuickOPC, add the value to C4.) When using EC or REC, add the number of multi-copy sessions to obtain N1. When using OPC, add the number of multi-copy sessions to obtain N2. When using QuickOPC, add the number of multi-copy sessions to obtain N4. In this example, use 12 (= 4 + 8) for N1, N2, or N4, depending on the copy type. When using multi-copy and executing OPC Restoration from the copy destination, select one copy destination and apply the above formula. (For QuickOPC, the QuickOPC destination should be used.) Other copy destinations are calculated as for normal multi-copy. 162 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED P2X0-0700-07ENZ0 Chapter 5 Configuration 5.4 Advanced Copy Management *2: For SnapOPC+, copy capacity indicates the total capacity of SnapOPC+ copy source volumes (slices or partitions) × number of generations in a device. [Example] Calculating capacity of SnapOPC+ sessions: SnapOPC+ copy area in the copy source volume C: 200MB, Number of SnapOPC+ generations: 8 SnapOPC+ copy area in the copy source volume D: 500MB, Number of SnapOPC+ generations: 4 D C Capacity of SnapOPC+ copy source = 200 [MB] × 8 + 500 [MB] × 4 = 3600 [MB] 3600 [MB] derived above is the copy source capacity C6. *3: In the example above, use 12 (= 8 + 4) for N6, the number of SnapOPC+ sessions (total number of generations). The procedure to set the copy table size is as follows: Procedure 1 Click the [Modify Copy Table Size] under the [Advanced Copy Management] menu on the [Volume Settings] tab. → The [Modify Copy Table Size] screen appears. 2 Specify the following items, and click the [Set] button. • Advanced Copy feature enabled Select whether to turn the Advanced Copy feature "On" or "Off". • Copy Table Size - Resolution Select from "× 1", "× 2", "× 4", "× 8", or "× 16". - Table Size (MB) For ETERNUS DX60, select between 0 and 64 (MB). For ETERNUS DX80/DX90, select between 0 and 128 (MB). (Unit: 8MB) "Off" can be selected for the "Advanced Copy feature enabled" when the copy table size is 0 (MB). Stop the copy session before reducing the table size. 163 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED P2X0-0700-07ENZ0 Chapter 5 Configuration 5.4 Advanced Copy Management → A confirmation screen appears. 3 Click the [OK] button. → The copy table size is set. End of procedure 5.4.7 Set Copy Path The [Set Copy Path] function creates copy path information used for REC on the wizard screen. The copy path information for the local device and copy path information between different devices can be set. Download the created path information to a PC and apply it to other devices. This simplifies settings for the next devices. The [Set Copy Path] provides the following functions: (1) Register Device Information Register the Box IDs for devices to create a copy path. Registering two or more devices is required when creating a copy path. Also, select a port to be used for creating the copy path for each device. (2) Create Copy Path Create copy path information between devices. 164 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED P2X0-0700-07ENZ0 Chapter 5 Configuration 5.4 Advanced Copy Management (3) Download Download one of the following information sets in file format. - Copy path information created in (2) - Existing copy path information - Device information (4) Apply Copy Path Apply the copy path information in the local device (*1) (5) Measure Round Trip Time Measures the round trip time between the local and remote devices. Operation mode can be selected in the Start screen of the Set Copy Path wizard. Select and perform one of the functions described above. • Register Device Information (Register) • Create Copy Path (Create) • Download (Download) • Apply Copy Path (Apply) • Measure Round Trip Time (Measure) *1: Copy path information of the local device can be deleted from the Apply Copy Path screen. • This function is available when using an ETERNUS DX90. • One source device can have copy paths set for a maximum of 16 destination devices. • Up to eight copy paths can be created between a pair of remote and local devices. • Up to 32 ports can be connected from one port. • Only the ETERNUS DX90 can be registered in "Register Device Information" • Only files that are created in the ETERNUS DX90 or files that are converted to a format that supports the ETERNUS DX90 with other ETERNUS DX Disk storage systems can be applied for the copy path information in "Apply Copy Path". A copy path information file for which the information on the local device does not exist cannot be applied to the ETERNUS DX90. When the ETERNUS DX90 S2, ETERNUS DX410 S2/DX440 S2, or ETERNUS DX8100 S2/DX8700 S2 is set as the connection destination of the copy path, a copy path file that is created and converted using GUI for the ETERNUS DX90 S2, ETERNUS DX410 S2/DX440 S2, or ETERNUS DX8100 S2/DX8700 S2 must be applied. 165 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED P2X0-0700-07ENZ0 Chapter 5 Configuration 5.4 Advanced Copy Management The procedure for setting copy path is as follows: Select Operation Mode Select the operation mode. Procedure 1 Click the [Set Copy Path] under the [Advanced Copy Management] menu on the [Volume Settings] tab. → The [Copy Path Setting Wizard] screen appears in the [Set Copy Path] screen. 2 Select the operation mode, and click the [Next >] button. • • • • • Operation Mode Create Copy Path Export Copy Path Information Export Storage System Information Apply Copy Path Measure Round Trip Time → The screen that is displayed varies depending on the selected operation mode. - When selecting "Operation Mode Create Copy Path" The screen for selecting the copy path creation method appears. Proceed with the procedure described in "Register Device Information". - When selecting "Export Copy Path Information" The screen for exporting the copy path information appears. Proceed with the procedure described in "Download". - When selecting "Export Storage System Information" The screen for exporting storage system information appears. Proceed with the procedure described in "Download". - When selecting "Apply Copy Path" The screen for applying the copy path appears. Proceed with the procedure described in "Apply Copy Path". 166 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED P2X0-0700-07ENZ0 Chapter 5 Configuration 5.4 Advanced Copy Management - When selecting "Measure Round Trip Time" The screen for measuring round trip time appears. Proceed with the procedure described in "Measure Round Trip Time". End of procedure Register Device Information Procedure 1 Specify the following items, and click the [Next >] button. • Use of existing information Select the following items when using existing device information. - Use storage system(Backup File) Use the backup file stored in the device system disk. - Use file The copy path information file is stored in the PC that it was created in using the procedure described in "Create Copy Path" and exported using the procedure described in "Download". - Not use • Add of device information Select whether to add device information or not. - Add Select the addition method from "File", "Manual", or both of "File" and "Manual". When selecting "File" or both "File" and "Manual", use the existing device information. Device information includes the device Box ID. - Not add → The next screen varies depending on the selected item. - When selecting "Use storage system(Backup File)" A confirmation screen for registering device information appears. Proceed to Step 3. - When selecting "Use file" The Select Copy Path Information File screen appears. Proceed to Step 2. 167 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED P2X0-0700-07ENZ0 Chapter 5 Configuration 5.4 Advanced Copy Management - When selecting "Not use" When selecting "File" or both "File" and "Manual" as the addition method, the screen for selecting the device information file appears. Proceed to Step 7. When selecting "Manual" for the addition method, the screen for inputting device information appears. Proceed to Step 11. 2 Specify the copy path information file, and click the [Next >] button. → A confirmation screen for registering device information appears. 3 Select the Box ID for the device that will be registered, and click the [Next >] button. → A confirmation screen appears. 168 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED P2X0-0700-07ENZ0 Chapter 5 Configuration 5.4 Advanced Copy Management 4 Click the [OK] button. → The specified contents are registered. The screen to select a port appears. Proceed to Step 5. However, if the target device is not selected in Step 3 (or the selected device does not exist), the port selecting screen does not appear. The screen for selecting a device information file appears instead. Proceed to Step 7. 5 Select the port to be used for each device, and click the [Next >] button. Select the port in which the port mode is "RA". → A confirmation screen appears. 6 Click the [OK] button. → The specified contents are registered. The screen for selecting a device information file appears. 169 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED P2X0-0700-07ENZ0 Chapter 5 Configuration 5.4 Advanced Copy Management 7 Specify the following items, and click the [Next >] button. • Select Operation Method - Finish of Registration by File Reading - Registration from File • Select Device Information File - Device information file When selecting "Registration from File", specify the location where the device information file is stored. → The specified contents are registered. When selecting "Registration from File", the execution screen for reading a device information file appears. Then, the screen for selecting a port appears. Proceed to Step 8. When selecting "Finish of Registration by File Reading", and "Manual" is selected for the "Add of device information" field in Step 1, the screen for inputting device information appears. Proceed to Step 11. If "Manual" is not selected, a confirmation screen for the device information appears. Proceed to Step 15. 170 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED P2X0-0700-07ENZ0 Chapter 5 Configuration 5.4 Advanced Copy Management 8 Select the port to be used for each device, and click the [Next >] button. Select the port in which the port mode is "RA". → A confirmation screen appears. 9 Click the [OK] button. → The specified contents are registered. Returns to the screen for selecting a device information file. 10 Click the [Next >] button. → When "Manual" is selected for the "Add device information" field in Step 1, the screen for inputting device information appears. Proceed to Step 11. If "Manual" is not selected in Step 1, a confirmation screen for the device information appears. Proceed to Step 15. 171 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED P2X0-0700-07ENZ0 Chapter 5 Configuration 5.4 Advanced Copy Management 11 Specify the following items, and click the [Next >] button. When "Manual" is selected, specify the Box ID and Unique Number. • Select Operation Method - Finish of Registration by File Reading - Registration by Manual Operation • Device Information Setting - Box ID Input the Box ID for the new device that will be registered using 40 characters. Capital letters, numerals, symbols (’#’), and blanks can be used. - Unique Number Input a unique number for the new device that will be registered using 4 hexadecimal numbers. Enter the value of the fifth and sixth bytes of the WWN. [Example] When the WWN is 500000E0D04C5800: Enter "4C58" → The specified contents are registered. When selecting "Registration by Manual Operation", the screen for setting a port appears. Proceed to Step 12. If "Finish of Registration by File Reading" is selected, a confirmation screen for device information appears. Proceed to Step 15. 172 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED P2X0-0700-07ENZ0 Chapter 5 Configuration 5.4 Advanced Copy Management 12 Select the port to be used for each device, and click the [Next >] button. Select the port in which the port mode is "RA". → A confirmation screen appears. 13 Click the [OK] button. → A confirmation screen for device information appears. 14 Click the [Next >] button. → A confirmation screen appears. 173 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED P2X0-0700-07ENZ0 Chapter 5 Configuration 5.4 Advanced Copy Management 15 Click the [Next >] button. → The specified contents are registered. The screen for selecting a device to create a copy path appears. Proceed with the procedure described in "Create Copy Path". End of procedure Create Copy Path Create copy path. Specify the Box ID for the device to create a copy path, and set line information and the copy path between the devices. Procedure 1 Select the Box ID for the destination device connected to the source device to create the copy path, and click the [Next >] button. → The screen for creating a copy path appears. 174 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED P2X0-0700-07ENZ0 Chapter 5 Configuration 5.4 Advanced Copy Management 2 Specify the following items, and click the [Next >] button. • Select Copy Path - Set Line • Connection Type Select "Remote" or "Direct". • Link Speed (Mbit/s) When selecting "Remote" in the Connection Type field, specify the link speed between 1 and 65535(Mbit/s). • Compression Ratio (%) When selecting "Remote" for the Connection Type field, specify the line compression ratio between 0 and 99(%). - Copy Path Select the copy path between the copy source and destination devices. → Returns to the screen to select device creating copy path. 3 Create copy paths to all the destination devices for each source device. Select the "Change Source Device" and click the [Next >] button to change the source device. 175 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED P2X0-0700-07ENZ0 Chapter 5 Configuration 5.4 Advanced Copy Management 4 After creating copy paths to all the destination devices, select the "Finish Path Creating" and click the [Next >] button. → A confirmation screen for the copy path appears. 5 Click the [Next >] button. → The screen for downloading a file appears. Proceed with the procedure described in "Download". End of procedure 176 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED P2X0-0700-07ENZ0 Chapter 5 Configuration 5.4 Advanced Copy Management Download Download the copy path information created with the procedure described in "Create Copy Path" or existing copy path information. By downloading the copy path information as a file, copy path information can be applied to the local and other devices. Procedure 1 Click the [Download] button. • Download File screen (Create Path) This screen is displayed when selecting "Create Copy Path" for "Operation Mode". • Download File screen (Export Copy Path Information) This screen is displayed when selecting "Export Copy Path Information" for "Operation Mode". 177 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED P2X0-0700-07ENZ0 Chapter 5 Configuration 5.4 Advanced Copy Management • Download File screen (Export Storage System Information) This screen is displayed when selecting "Export Storage System Information" for "Operation Mode". If no RA ports are defined in the ETERNUS DX90, downloading information is not allowed (the [Download] button is not displayed). 2 Click the [Next >] button or [Finish] button. When applying copy path information, click the [Next >] button. When finishing the settings, click the [End] button. → A confirmation screen or exit confirmation screen appears. 3 Click the [OK] button. → When clicking the [Next >] button in Step 2, the screen with the device connection list appears. Proceed to "Apply Copy Path". When clicking the [End] button in Step 2, the exit screen appears. Proceed to "Exit Wizard". End of procedure Apply Copy Path Apply or delete copy path information in the local device. • When applying copy path information, the copy path currently registered in the local device is deleted. • If REC sessions exist in the local device, changing or deleting copy path information in use affects copy operation. • If deleting copy path when no path information exists between the local and remote devices, all the copy path information in the local device will be deleted. 178 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED P2X0-0700-07ENZ0 Chapter 5 Configuration 5.4 Advanced Copy Management Procedure 1 Select one of the following items, and click the [Next >] button. • Copy Path Information - Set path information Specify the location of the copy path information file. - Delete the path information of the device This screen is not displayed when selecting "Create Copy Path" for operation mode. The screen with the device connection list appears instead. Proceed to Step 2. → When selecting "Set path information", the screen with the device connection list appears. Proceed to Step 2. When selecting "Delete the path information of the device", a confirmation screen appears. Proceed to Step 3. 179 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED P2X0-0700-07ENZ0 Chapter 5 Configuration 5.4 Advanced Copy Management 2 Check the copy path in the device connection list and click the [Next >] button. When the link for Remote Device Box ID is clicked, the screen for confirming copy path information appears and the copy path information can be checked. → A confirmation screen appears. 180 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED P2X0-0700-07ENZ0 Chapter 5 Configuration 5.4 Advanced Copy Management 3 Click the [OK] button. - When selecting "Set path information" → A confirmation screen appears. Then the progress screen appears. When selecting "Set path information", the screen for measuring round trip time appears. Proceed with the procedure described in "Measure Round Trip Time". However, if no remote device exists, the exit screen appears. Proceed with the procedure described in "Exit Wizard". When selecting "Delete the path information of the device", the exit screen appears after completing the operation. Proceed with the procedure described in "Exit Wizard". End of procedure Measure Round Trip Time Measure round trip time between the local and remote devices. Destination devices in which the connection type is "Remote" can be target devices. • The measured round trip time value is applied to the ETERNUS DX90. Make sure to suspend the REC sessions in advance. • When the communication environment between devices is changed, measure the round trip time again. • Measuring the round trip time may take a maximum of 160 seconds. Procedure 1 Select the target device and click the [Next >] button. → A confirmation screen appears. Proceed to Step 2. However, if no target device is selected, the exit screen appears. Proceed with the procedure described in "Exit Wizard". 181 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED P2X0-0700-07ENZ0 Chapter 5 Configuration 5.4 Advanced Copy Management 2 Click the [OK] button. → The execution screen appears. Then the progress screen appears. After completing the process, the result screen for measuring round trip time appears. 3 Click the [Next >] button. → The exit screen appears. Proceed with the procedure described in "Exit Wizard". End of procedure 182 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED P2X0-0700-07ENZ0 Chapter 5 Configuration 5.4 Advanced Copy Management Exit Wizard Close the wizard and finish the copy path settings. Procedure 1 Click the [Close] button. → The wizard screen is closed. The copy path settings complete. End of procedure 183 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED P2X0-0700-07ENZ0 Chapter 5 Configuration 5.4 Advanced Copy Management 5.4.8 Modify Port Mode The [Modify Port Mode] changes the port mode (Channel Adapter (CA) or Remote Adapter (RA)). • CA Used for connecting to the host. • RA Used for performing REC. • The [Modify Port Mode] function is available when using ETERNUS DX90. • When changing the port mode of a live port from "CA" to "RA", it is necessary to stop the host access connected to the CA Port to be changed. To change the mode of a newly added port, it is not necessary to stop host access. • When changing the port mode of a live port from "RA" to "CA", it is necessary to check that there is no session in the RA Port to be changed. If changing the port mode, specified copy path information in the target port will be deleted. • If changing the port mode from "CA" to "RA", LUN mapping information in the target CA port will be deleted. • If changing the port mode from "RA" to "CA", specified copy path information in the target RA port will be deleted. The procedure to modify port mode is as follows: Procedure 1 Click the [Modify Port Mode] under the [Advanced Copy Management] menu on the [Volume Settings] tab. → The [Modify Port Mode] screen appears. 184 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED P2X0-0700-07ENZ0 Chapter 5 Configuration 5.4 Advanced Copy Management 2 Specify the "Port Mode (After)", and click the [Set] button. → A confirmation screen appears. 3 Click the [OK] button. → The port mode is set. End of procedure 185 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED P2X0-0700-07ENZ0 Chapter 5 Configuration 5.4 Advanced Copy Management 5.4.9 Modify REC Multiplicity The [Modify REC Multiplicity] function sets the REC multiplicity. REC multiplicity is the line speed parameter for each copy path. By specifying the appropriate multiplicity, the device controls the I/O of the line being used for remote connection, and uses lines efficiently. • This function is available when using ETERNUS DX90. • Normally, do not change REC multiplicity and make sure to use the default ("Auto") setting. • If no destination device information is registered, this function is not available. • Each line device may not perform with the REC multiplicity specified with this function. Setting values are used as information for using a line efficiently. • Suspend the session status between the devices in the following conditions. In other cases, there is no need to suspend the copy session. - When changing the connection method ("Direct" or "Remote") - When measuring round trip time again • The REC multiplicity can be specified when selecting "Remote" for the specification mode in "5.4.7 Set Copy Path" (page 164). • In the following conditions, EC/OPC priorities specified in "5.4.5 Modify EC/OPC Priority" (page 158) is used instead of REC multiplicity: - When the connection method is "Direct" - When no REC multiplicity is set • Specified REC multiplicity is enabled immediately The procedure to set REC multiplicity is as follows: Procedure 1 Click the [Modify REC Multiplicity] under the [Advanced Copy Management] menu on the [Volume Settings] tab. → The [Modify REC Multiplicity] screen appears. 186 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED P2X0-0700-07ENZ0 Chapter 5 Configuration 5.4 Advanced Copy Management 2 Specify the following items, and click the [Set] button. • Specification Mode - Manual Specify REC multiplicity. - Auto Use the recommended multiplicity that is automatically calculated from the device. • Multiplicity When selecting "Manual" for the specification mode, specify the REC multiplicity between 1 and 256 using numeral characters. When the round trip time is not obtained, "***" is displayed. To display the recommended multiplicity, obtaining round trip time using the [Set Copy Path] function is required. 3 Click the [OK] button. → The REC multiplicity is set. End of procedure 187 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED P2X0-0700-07ENZ0 Chapter 5 Configuration 5.4 Advanced Copy Management 5.4.10 Modify REC Buffer The [Modify REC Buffer] function sets the transfer buffer for copying data via the REC buffer in asynchronous Consistency mode. Copy via REC buffer stores multiple REC session I/Os in the REC buffer for a certain period of time, and copies them in blocks. This enables mirroring of whole database and securing copy speed when performing REC between remote locations, several thousand kilometers away from the source device. Consistency mode stores data in the large capacity of REC transfer buffer for a certain period of time, and copies them at one time. Note that one REC buffer cannot be used bi-directionally (both of sending and receiving). When performing REC bi-directionally, also set the REC buffers in the opposite direction. REC buffer usage can also be checked using the ETERNUS SF AdvancedCopy Manager (ACM). • This function is available when using the ETERNUS DX90. • REC buffer must be specified for both devices performing REC. Note that one REC buffer is unidirectional. When transferring data bi-directionally, both of sending and receiving REC buffers must be specified in the each device. • Up to four REC buffers can be specified. A maximum of 512MB REC buffers in total can be secured. • When changing or deleting REC buffers, suspend the sessions using the target REC buffers. • When copying data via REC buffer, REC buffer settings are required in both of copy source and copy destination devices. Make the REC buffer size the same for the devices of the copy source and destination. The size will be adjusted to whichever is smaller. • If no destination device and/or copy path are set, REC buffer setting is not available. Refer to "5.4 Advanced Copy Management" (page 139) for details about REC data transfer method and mode. The procedure for setting REC buffer is as follows: Procedure 1 Click the [Modify REC Buffer] under the [Advanced Copy Management] menu on the [Volume Settings] tab. → The [Modify REC Buffer] screen appears. 188 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED P2X0-0700-07ENZ0 Chapter 5 Configuration 5.4 Advanced Copy Management 2 Specify the following items, and click the [Set] button. • Usage Select the usage of REC buffer from "Send" or "Receive". If the REC buffer is not set, "Unused" is displayed. When the target REC buffer is not used, select "Unused". • Remote Box ID Select the Box ID for the remote device. A ’- (hyphen)’ is displayed when the usage of REC buffer is "Unused". If the REC path information is deleted, "???" is displayed. Select "Unused" for REC buffer usage or select a new remote Box ID. • Size (MB) Select the REC buffer size (MB) from the following: - 128 - 256 - 512 REC buffer size is secured from the cache memory. When using broadband connections or responding to temporary line transfer delays, a larger REC buffer size is needed. • Forwarding Interval (sec) Select the forwarding interval (second) to transfer the data stored in the REC buffer to the destination device from the following: - 1 - 2 - 4 - 8 - 15 - 30 - 45 - 60 - 75 - 90 - 105 - 120 A long interval will reduce the Host I/O overhead, but increases the amount of data susceptible to loss in the event of disaster. 189 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED P2X0-0700-07ENZ0 Chapter 5 Configuration 5.4 Advanced Copy Management • Monitoring Time (min) Select from 0 to 15 (minutes) for the REC buffer monitoring time. The recommended value is "5 (minutes)". When the REC Buffer has large amounts of data to be stored and is in a high-load state, the time required for I/O responses to the server delays for the specified time in the "HALT Wait Timer" (from the server's viewpoint, the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 seems to be delaying its response). Once the delay state has continued for longer than the watch time setting (this item), all REC Consistency mode sessions that are currently transferring data are HALTed to allow priority processing of the server responses. If "0 (minutes)" is set, monitoring is disabled. • HALT Wait Timer (sec) Select from 0 to 15 (seconds) for the HALT Wait Timer. Although the recommended value is "15 (seconds)", select the appropriate value considering the effect on the system. HALT Wait Timer is the maximum no-response time for which host I/O responses may be delayed in order to prioritize data transfers from the REC Buffer when it is in a highload state. When the set time is exceeded, responses for the Host I/O is restarted, but the REC session is automatically HALTed. If "0 (seconds)" is set, the Host I/O always takes priority when this occurs and the copy session is HALTed immediately. → A confirmation screen appears. An error screen appears in the following conditions: • Clicking the [Set] button without changing any setting values • When two or more REC buffers have the same usage and the same remote Box ID • The total size of four REC buffers exceeds 512MB • Clicking the [Set] button when any of the remote Box ID is "???" 190 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED P2X0-0700-07ENZ0 Chapter 5 Configuration 5.4 Advanced Copy Management Make sure to set the same REC buffer information (size, forwarding interval, monitoring time, and HALT wait timer) for copy source and copy destination devices. 3 Click the [OK] button. → The REC buffer is set. End of procedure 191 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED P2X0-0700-07ENZ0 Chapter 6 Global Settings This chapter describes the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 global setting menu. The global settings provides the following functions: • User Management • Network Settings • Remote Support • System Settings • Host I/F Management 6.1 User Management This section describes how to manage the user account. ● User Role The available functions depend on the user role (privileges of the account) used to logon. The following table provides the description for each user role. 6.1.1 User role Available functions Default account Advanced "Advanced" is a maintenance engineer privilege. Functions such as status display, configuration management, and maintenance functions are available. f.ce Standard "Standard" is a system administrator privilege. Functions such as status display and configuration management are available. root Monitor "Monitor" is a general user privilege. Only the status display function is available. None Setup User Account The [Setup User Account] function adds, edits, and deletes the user account. • Up to 16 users including default accounts (f.ce and root) can be registered. • Default accounts (f.ce and root) can be edited or deleted. • Entered letters are case-sensitive. • The current user account (your account) can be changed or deleted. When deleting a user account, at least one manager account (Standard or Advanced) must remain. The changed or deleted setting will be available from next logon. 192 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED P2X0-0700-07ENZ0 Chapter 6 Global Settings 6.1 User Management The procedure to add a new user is as follows: Procedure 1 Click the [Setup User Account] under the [User Management] menu on the [Global Settings] tab. → The [Setup User Account] screen appears. 2 Click the [Add] button. → The "Add New User Account" field is displayed. When editing or deleting the user account, select the target user account from the "Registered user Account List" field, and click the [Edit] or [Delete] button. 193 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED P2X0-0700-07ENZ0 Chapter 6 Global Settings 6.1 User Management 3 Specify the following items, and click the [Apply] button. • User Name Set the user name between 4 to 16 characters. Alphanumeric characters and symbols ('! (exclamation mark)', '- (hyphen)', '_ (underscore)', and '. (period)') can be used. • New Password Set the password between 4 to 16 characters. Alphanumeric characters and symbols ('! (exclamation mark)', '- (hyphen)', '_ (underscore)', and '. (period)') can be used. • Confirm New Password Input the same character strings as the value entered in the "New Password" field for confirmation. • User Role Select the user role from "Advanced", "Standard", and "Monitor". Select "Advanced" for the maintenance engineer account, select "Standard" for the system administrator account, and select "Monitor" for a general user account. Refer to "2.5 Operation Screens" (page 19) for available functions for each privilege. • Account Select whether to "Enable" or "Disable" the user account. If the user account is disabled, that user account is registered but cannot be used. • SSH Public Key Register the SSH public key used for logon authentication from CLI. When registering SSH public key, click the [Browse...] button to specify the public key. • When registering a user account, an error occurs in the following conditions. - When the specified user name is already registered - When the "User Name", "New Password", and/or "Confirm New Password", are not entered - When the password does not match the confirmation password - When the user name or password is less than 4, or more than 16 characters (If 17 or more characters are entered, ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 ignores the 17th and later characters, and the password is registered using the first 16 characters only) - When the user name or password includes characters other than alphanumeric characters and symbols ('! (exclamation mark)', '- (hyphen)', '_ (underscore)', and '. (period)') • When using the SSH Client Key authentication, register the SSH public key in the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 and prepare the SSH secret key, corresponding to the public key in the client PC in advance. • The following types (formats) of public keys can be used: - RSA for SSH1 (OpenSSH) - DSA for SSH2 (IETF) (*1) - RSA for SSH2 (IETF) *1: Up to 1024 bits of SSH public key file can be registered. 194 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED P2X0-0700-07ENZ0 Chapter 6 Global Settings 6.1 User Management → A confirmation screen appears. 4 Click the [OK] button. → New user account is registered in the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90. End of procedure 6.1.2 Change User Password The [Change User Password] function changes the current user's (your) password. The procedure to change your password is as follows: Procedure 1 Click the [Change User Password] under the [User Management] menu on the [Global Settings] tab. → The [Change User Password] screen appears. 195 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED P2X0-0700-07ENZ0 Chapter 6 Global Settings 6.1 User Management 2 Specify the following items, and click the [Change] button. • User Name Current user's (your) name is displayed. • User Role Current user's (your) user role is displayed. • Old Password Input the current password. • New Password Set the new password between 4 to 16 characters. Alphanumeric characters and symbols ('! (exclamation mark)', '- (hyphen)', '_ (underscore)', and '. (period)') can be used. • Confirm New Password Input the same character strings as the value entered in the "New Password" field for confirmation. When changing a user password, an error occurs in the following conditions. • When the "Old Password" does not match the current password • When the "New Password", "Confirm New Password", and/or "Old Password" is not entered • When the password does not match the confirmation password • When the password is less than 4, or more than 16 characters (If 17 or more characters are entered, ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 ignores the 17th and later characters, and the password is registered using the first 16 characters only) • When the password includes characters other than alphanumeric characters and symbols ('! (exclamation mark)', '- (hyphen)', '_ (underscore)', and '. (period)') → A confirmation screen appears. 196 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED P2X0-0700-07ENZ0 Chapter 6 Global Settings 6.1 User Management 3 Click the [OK] button. → The password is changed. End of procedure 6.1.3 Initialize User Account The [Initialize User Account] function initializes a registered user account. By using this function, registered accounts are deleted and the default accounts (f.ce and root) revert back to factory settings. Passwords for default accounts are also restored to default settings. The procedure to initialize user account is as follows: Procedure 1 Click the [Initialize User Account] under the [User Management] menu on the [Global Settings] tab. → The [Initialize User Account] screen appears. 2 Click the [Initialize] button. → A confirmation screen appears. 197 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED P2X0-0700-07ENZ0 Chapter 6 Global Settings 6.1 User Management 3 Click the [OK] button. → The user accounts are initialized. End of procedure 198 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED P2X0-0700-07ENZ0 Chapter 6 Global Settings 6.2 Network Settings 6.2 Network Settings 6.2.1 Setup Network Environment Set the environment for the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 to communicate with external hosts on TCP/IP based network. The IP address, subnet mask, default gateway, DNS server of the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90, and network address for the remote operation from outside of the subnet can be set. Network environment setting is required for each MNT and RMT port. • MNT port MNT port is used for general communication between ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 and external hosts. • RMT port RMT port is used for communication between ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 and Remote Support center. • If the IP address or the subnet mask for the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/ DX90 is changed, changing the network address (IP address or subnet mask) of the FST may be required. • If the IP address of the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 becomes uncertain, refer to "ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Disk storage system User Guide" to initialize the IP address. • After completing the setting, logon to GUI again. The procedure to set the network environment is as follows: Procedure 1 Click the [Setup Network Environment] under the [Network Settings] menu on the [Global Settings] tab. → The [Setup Network Environment] screen appears. 199 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED P2X0-0700-07ENZ0 Chapter 6 Global Settings 6.2 Network Settings 2 Specify the following items, and click the [Set] button. • Select Network Port Select the setting target port from "MNT" or "RMT". • Interface - Speed and Duplex Select the communication speed and mode from the following. • Auto Negotiation • 1Gbit/s • 100Mbit/s Half • 100Mbit/s Full • 10Mbit/s Half • 10Mbit/s Full - Master CM IP Address Set the IP address (0 to 255) for the Master CM (required). - Slave CM IP Address Set the IP address (0 to 255) for the Slave CM. Specify this value when duplicating the LAN path. When the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 has only one CM, a Slave IP address cannot be specified. - Subnet Mask Set the subnet mask (0 to 255) for the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Disk storage system (required). - Default Gateway Set the IP address for the default gateway (0 to 255). - Primary DNS Set the IP address for the Primary DNS server (0 to 255). - Secondary DNS Set the IP address for the Secondary DNS server (0 to 255). - http Select whether to "Enable" or "Disable" the http connection. This connection is used when accessing from GUI. - https Select whether to "Enable" or "Disable" the https connection. This connection is used when accessing from GUI. - telnet Select whether to "Enable" or "Disable" the telnet connection. This connection is used when accessing from CLI. - SSH Select whether to "Enable" or "Disable" the SSH connection. This connection is used when accessing from CLI. - Maintenance Select whether to "Enable" or "Disable" the Maintenance connection. This connection is used when accessing from the monitoring software. 200 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED P2X0-0700-07ENZ0 Chapter 6 Global Settings 6.2 Network Settings - Maintenance-Secure Select whether to "Enable" or "Disable" the Maintenance-Secure connection. This connection is used when accessing from the monitoring software. This connection uses the data encryption for data transferring. - ICMP Select whether to "Enable" or "Disable" the ICMP connection. This connection is used when transferring ping command from PC. • Allowed IP List The value entered in this field is enabled when the default gateway has been set. Set the destination network address (IP address and subnet mask). Up to 16 addresses can be set. Make sure to set the IP address and subnet mask in pairs. • Note the following when specifying the IP address and subnet mask. - Specify the IP address using IPv4 notation (character string in d.d.d.d format based on the 256 radix system). - RMT port is used when it is required to use the dedicated network for Remote Support. IP addresses for the RMT port and MNT port must be in different subnets. - "Slave CM IP Address" is specified when connecting to the Slave CM. IP addresses for the Slave CM and Master CM must be in the same subnet. - Specify the IP address of "Default Gateway" when allowing access from outside of the subnetwork. The IP address must be in the same subnetwork as the port. - For "Allowed IP List", specify the IP address or network address of an ETERNUS DX Disk storage system to allow the ETERNUS DX Disk storage system to connect to the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90. These settings are not required when connecting the ETERNUS DX Disk storage system that belongs to the same network address (same sub-network) as the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90. • If ports of all the protocols are disabled, access to the device is not allowed. When access to the device is not allowed, refer to "ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Disk storage systems User Guide" to reset the settings. For the two CMs in the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90, the CM that has the priority to manage the device is called the Master CM, and the other is called the Slave CM. If a CM or LAN failure occurs, ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 changes the Master CM automatically. The IP address for prior Master CM is taken over to the new Master CM. Specifying an IP address for the Slave CM enables forcible changing of the Master CM. When an error occurs and access to the Master CM is disabled, users can access the Slave CM and change the Master CM. 201 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED P2X0-0700-07ENZ0 Chapter 6 Global Settings 6.2 Network Settings → A confirmation screen appears. 3 Click the [OK] button. → The network environment is set. Device setting operation cannot be continued if the IP address is changed. Logon again with the new IP address is required. End of procedure 202 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED P2X0-0700-07ENZ0 Chapter 6 Global Settings 6.2 Network Settings 6.2.2 Setup SNMP Agent Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) is a standard protocol used by the network management of TCP/IP. This standard protocol is used to monitor the equipment connected with the network, via the network. SNMP is comprised of a monitoring part (SNMP Manager) and a monitored part (SNMP Agent). Information to be transferred with SNMP is defined in the Management Information Base (MIB), a database installed in the SNMP Agent. The equipment that configures the network is managed by transferring parameters between the SNMP Manager and SNMP Agent. SNMP uses the following five commands to request, respond to, and provide the management information between SNMP Manager and SNMP Agent. When an ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 uses the SNMP Agent environment, it is necessary to install software in the SNMP Manager. The procedure to set an SNMP Agent is as follows: Procedure 1 Click the [Setup SNMP Agent] under the [Network Settings] menu on the [Global Settings] tab. → The [Setup SNMP Agent] screen appears. 2 Specify the following items. Click the link on the left of the screen to display the setting fields for each item. • When the entry, numbers, or characters of setting items are wrong, an error screen appears. • Capital letters and lower case letters distinguish entered letters. • One blank in the "Community Name" field represents two characters. 203 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED P2X0-0700-07ENZ0 Chapter 6 Global Settings 6.2 Network Settings • Basic Interface Specify the following items: - SNMP Function Select whether to "Enable" or "Disable" the SNMP function. - LAN Port used for SNMP When "Enable" is selected for "SNMP Function", select "MNT" or "RMT". - Authentication Failure When "Enable" is selected for "SNMP Function", select "Send SNMP Trap" or "Do not send SNMP Trap" for when authentication fails. - Abnormal parts during maintenance When reflecting an error status during maintenance, set "Notification". When not reflecting, set "Not notification". 204 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED P2X0-0700-07ENZ0 Chapter 6 Global Settings 6.2 Network Settings • Community Name Community is a range of available networks for SNMP. The setting value is used as the password for SNMP Manager to access the SNMP Agent. The SNMP Agent accepts the request from the SNMP Manager when the SNMP Manager reports the same Community as the SNMP Agent's Community. The "Read Only" access privileges is added for the specified Community. Community with other access privileges cannot be specified. If no Community is specified, [public] is used as default. The following procedure describes how to set a new Community. Specify the following items, and click the [Add New Community] button. - Community Name Specify the Community name to which to transfer the trap. Between 1 and 50 alphanumeric characters, symbols ('!', '#', '$', '% (except for the first letter)', '&', '_ (underscore)', '+', '- (hyphen)', '*', and '/'), and blanks can be used (required). - IP Address Specify the IP address for the SNMP Manager. When "0.0.0.0" is specified, all hosts are accepted. - MIB View Setting Specify the MIB View name accessed by this Community (may be omitted, which will allow access to all Objects). When the SNMP server is in different subnetwork where the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 belongs, setting network address in the "Allowed IP List" described in the "6.2.1 Setup Network Environment" (page 199) is required. The new Community is added in the "Set Community Name" field. 205 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED P2X0-0700-07ENZ0 Chapter 6 Global Settings 6.2 Network Settings • MIB View Setting MIB View is used for defining the accessible area in the Management Information Base (MIB) database, with a tree type structure. Use this function to release only the part of the information in the MIB. The following procedure describes how to set new MIB View. Specify the following items, and click the [Add New MIB View] button. - View Name Enter the MIB View Object ID within 60 numerals (including '.') (required). - Subtree Enter the Object ID for the subtree within 60 numerals (including '.'). A maximum of 15 subtrees can be specified at the same time. The new MIB View is added in the "Set MIB View" field. 206 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED P2X0-0700-07ENZ0 Chapter 6 Global Settings 6.2 Network Settings • Trap Trap is used to report the error contents to the SNMP Manager immediately when a device error occurs. The following procedure describes how to set new destination of SNMP Trap. Specify the following items, and click the [Add New Destination] button. - IP Address Specify the IP address for the transfer destination of the Trap (required). - Community Name Specify the Community name to which to transfer the trap. Between 1 and 50 alphanumeric characters, symbols ('!', '#', '$', '% (except for the first letter)', '&', '_ (underscore)', '+', '- (hyphen)', '*', and '/'), and blanks can be used (required). The new destination of SNMP Trap is added in the "Set Destination of SNMP Traps" field. 3 Click the [Set] button. → A confirmation screen appears. 4 Click the [OK] button. → The SNMP Agent is set. End of procedure 207 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED P2X0-0700-07ENZ0 Chapter 6 Global Settings 6.2 Network Settings 6.2.3 Download MIB File The [Download MIB File] function exports the MIB definition file registered in the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90. Management Information Base (MIB) is the information for Manager to manage Agent with Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP). This information is a database with a tree type structure. The MIB definition file is used for the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 SNMP environment settings, and for allowing other applications that use SNMP (SNMP Manager) to handle the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 (SNMP Agent). This function is necessary when the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 uses the SNMP Agent environment. The procedure to download MIB definition file is as follows: Procedure 1 Click the [Download MIB File] under the [Network Settings] menu on the [Global Settings] tab. → The [Download MIB File] screen appears. 2 Specify the following item, and click the [Download] button. • Option Select the "The ServerView control code is added to the comment line of the MIB definition file" checkbox when downloading MIB file used for device monitoring by ServerView. → A confirmation screen appears. 208 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED P2X0-0700-07ENZ0 Chapter 6 Global Settings 6.2 Network Settings 3 Click the [OK] button. → The MIB definition file is downloaded. A screen to save the downloaded MIB definition file appears. 4 Save the downloaded file. → The MIB definition file is saved. End of procedure 6.2.4 Perform SNMP Trap Test The [Perform SNMP Trap Test] function transmits the test trap from the SNMP Agent to the SNMP Manager. The SNMP trap is the event information reported by the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 (SNMP Agent) that contains the storage system status information. Perform SNMP Agent and SNMP Manager settings before executing this test. Perform "6.2.1 Setup Network Environment" (page 199) and "6.2.2 Setup SNMP Agent" (page 203) before using this function. This function transmits a test trap. The procedure to perform SNMP trap test is as follows: Procedure 1 Click the [Perform SNMP Trap Test] under the [Network Settings] menu on the [Global Settings] tab. → The [Perform SNMP Trap Test] screen appears. 209 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED P2X0-0700-07ENZ0 Chapter 6 Global Settings 6.2 Network Settings 2 Click the [Send] button. → A confirmation screen appears. 3 Click the [OK] button. → The SNMP trap test is performed. End of procedure Confirm that the trap can be normally received in the SNMP Manager after the SNMP Trap test. 6.2.5 Setup E-Mail Notification The [Setup E-Mail Notification] function configures the E-mail Notification settings for the various events detected by the storage system. If an error occurs in the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90, the E-Mail of error information is sent to the specified address. Refer to "6.4.7 Setup Event Notification" (page 245) for detailed contents of the event. 210 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED P2X0-0700-07ENZ0 Chapter 6 Global Settings 6.2 Network Settings Once an E-Mail address is specified, the address cannot be deleted (the address can be changed). When stopping the event notification via E-Mail, perform one of the following procedures. • Disable the "Notification E-Mail" • Clear the E-Mail checkbox of the notification method in the [Setup Event Notification] function The procedure to set the E-mail notification is as follows: Procedure 1 Click the [Setup E-Mail Notification] under the [Network Settings] menu on the [Global Settings] tab. → The [Setup E-Mail Notification] screen appears. 2 Specify the following items. Click the link on the left of the screen to display the setting fields for each item. • Notification E-Mail - Notification E-Mail Select whether to "Enable" or "Disable" the E-Mail send function. - Destination E-Mail Address Specify the E-Mail destination address. Up to five addresses can be registered. - Comment Input the message (comment) to be added to the E-Mail. Up to 255 alphanumeric characters, symbols, and blanks within 10 lines can be used. 211 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED P2X0-0700-07ENZ0 Chapter 6 Global Settings 6.2 Network Settings Click the [Send Test E-Mail] button to confirm that an E-Mail can be sent to the specified address. When sending a test E-Mail, select "Enable" for the "Notification E-Mail" setting. Note that clicking [Set] button is required when changing the parameters before sending a test E-Mail to enable the new settings. • Mail Server Settings - LAN Port used for SMTP Connection Select the LAN port connecting to the SMTP server from "MNT" or "RMT". - Sender E-Mail Address Input the mail sender E-Mail address. - SMTP Server Specify the IP address or domain name of the SMTP server to be used. - SMTP Port No. Input the port number used by the SMTP server. - SMTP requires authentication Select the user authorization method to connect to the SMTP server from "None" or "AUTH SMTP". - User Name If "AUTH SMTP" is selected for "SMTP requires authentication", input the sender user name. - Password If "AUTH SMTP" is selected for "SMTP requires authentication", input the sender password. - Authentication Method If "AUTH SMTP" is selected for "SMTP requires authentication", select the authentication method from "Automatic", "CRAM-MD5", "PLAIN", or "LOGIN". 212 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED P2X0-0700-07ENZ0 Chapter 6 Global Settings 6.2 Network Settings • Retry Setting - Maximum Retries Input the maximum number of retry ("0" or "1"). - Retry Interval (sec.) Specify the interval between retry (0 to 5) in units of seconds. 3 Click the [Set] button. → A confirmation screen appears. 4 Click the [OK] button. → The specified send E-mail setting is registered. End of procedure 6.2.6 Display SMTP Log The [Display SMTP Log] function displays the SMTP log between the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/ DX90 and the server. If the E-Mail communication is not working normally, this function may identify the cause of problem. SMTP log contains request from the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 to the server and response from the server to the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90. Note that this function displays the SMTP log for the latest event. Perform "6.2.5 Setup E-Mail Notification" (page 210) in advance. 213 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED P2X0-0700-07ENZ0 Chapter 6 Global Settings 6.2 Network Settings The procedure to display SMTP log is as follows: Procedure 1 Click the [Display SMTP Log] under the [Network Settings] menu on the [Global Settings] tab. → The [Display SMTP Log] screen appears. 2 Check the displayed "Event Type" and "Communication Log". Click the [Refresh] button to obtain the latest information. End of procedure 6.2.7 Renew SSL Certificate The [Renew SSL Certificate] function renews the unique SSL certificate for secure communication. The data transmitted in the network may be intercepted from a third party. This function creates the SSL certificate again, and prevents the impersonation caused by SSL certificate theft. The procedure to create SSL certificate is as follows: • When renewing the SSL certificate, GUI cannot be used until the renewal process has completed. Wait a few minutes before starting the next operation. • Re-install the web-site certificate in the web browser using the procedure described in "Appendix A Install Site Certificate" (page 302) as required. 214 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED P2X0-0700-07ENZ0 Chapter 6 Global Settings 6.2 Network Settings Procedure 1 Click the [Renew SSL Certificate] under the [Network Settings] menu on the [Global Settings] tab. → The [Renew SSL Certificate] screen appears. 2 Click the [Create] button. → A confirmation screen appears. 3 Click the [OK] button. → The SSL certificate is created. End of procedure 215 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED P2X0-0700-07ENZ0 Chapter 6 Global Settings 6.3 Remote Support 6.3 Remote Support The [Remote Support] setting menu registers user information related to the ETERNUS DX60/ DX80/DX90, and settings for Remote support function to REMCS (REMote Customer Support system) center and the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90. REMCS, a unique remote maintenance system by Fujitsu, provides the following maintenance functions. • Failure Notice This function reports various failures that occur in the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 to the REMCS center. The maintenance engineer is notified of a failure immediately. • Information Transfer This function sends information such as logs and configuration information to be used when checking a failure. It reduces time required to collect information for the REMCS center. 6.3.1 Display Support Information The [Display Support Information] function checks the Remote Support function settings and operation status. The procedure to check the display support information is as follows: Procedure 1 Click the [Display Support Information] under the [Remote Support] menu on the [Global Settings] tab. → The [Display Support Information] screen appears. 2 Check the displayed "Support Information" and "Event Information". 216 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED P2X0-0700-07ENZ0 Chapter 6 Global Settings 6.3 Remote Support Click the [Refresh] button to obtain the latest information. End of procedure 6.3.2 Display Communication Log This function displays the communication log when the Remote Support function is operated between the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 and the server. When the Remote Support function cannot be operated properly, for example, cannot be connected to the REMCS center, use this log to identify the cause of the problem. The communication log includes requests from the device to the server, and responses from the server to the device. Only the communication log of the last executed event is displayed. Setting the server connection in advance is necessary. The procedure to display the communication log is as follows: Procedure 1 Click the [Display Communication Log] under the [Remote Support] menu on the [Global Settings] tab. → The [Display Communication Log] screen appears. 2 Check the displayed "Event Type" and the "Communication Log". 217 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED P2X0-0700-07ENZ0 Chapter 6 Global Settings 6.3 Remote Support Click the [Refresh] button to obtain the latest information. End of procedure 6.3.3 Setup Remote Support The [Setup Remote Support] function registers the customer information and communication environment information required to be given to Remote Support from the REMCS center. • When changing the registered information, use the descriptions in "6.3.4 Update Customer Information" (page 226) and "6.3.5 Update Communication Environment Information" (page 228). • The Remote Support setting information file (customer information file and communication environment information file) created by using REMCS Environment Setup Assist Tool (REMCS ESAT) can be imported to the device, to simplify the input operation required to be set for each device. The procedure to set the Remote Support is as follows: Procedure 1 Click the [Setup Remote Support] under the [Remote Support] menu on the [Global Settings] tab. → The [Setup Remote Support] screen appears. 2 Specify the following items. When importing Remote Support settings to the ETERNUS DX60/ DX80/DX90 all at once, click the [Browse...] button to specify the location where the settings file has been stored, and click the [Import] button. • Customer Information Customer information saved in the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 can be deleted after transmitting the information to the REMCS center. Select the "Delete any Customer Identity information from the storage system after the information is sent to the "REMCS Center"." checkbox to delete the information. - Detailed Settings • Company Name Input the company name that owns ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 (required). Up to 60 alphanumeric characters can be used. • Department/Division Input the department or division that owns ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90. Up to 40 alphanumeric characters can be used. 218 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED P2X0-0700-07ENZ0 Chapter 6 Global Settings 6.3 Remote Support • Address Input the address of the company that owns ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 (required). Up to 60 alphanumeric characters can be used. • Building Name Input the building name where the company that owns ETERNUS DX60/DX80/ DX90 is located. Up to 40 alphanumeric characters can be used. • Administrator Name Input the system administrator's name that manages the ETERNUS DX60/ DX80/DX90 (required). Up to 40 alphanumeric characters and symbols can be used. • Administrator E-Mail Address Input the E-mail address of the system administrator who manages the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 (required). Up to 40 alphanumeric characters (including symbols) can be used. • Postal Code (Zip Code) Input the post code for the company that owns ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90. Up to 10 alphanumeric characters (including symbols) can be used. • Phone Number Input the phone number for the company that owns ETERNUS DX60/DX80/ DX90 (required). Up to 20 alphanumeric characters (including symbols) can be used. • FAX Number Input the FAX number for the company that owns ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90. Up to 20 alphanumeric characters (including symbols) can be used. • Storage System Unique Name Input the nickname for the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90. Up to 32 alphanumeric characters (including symbols) can be used. • Country of Installation (ISO3166 A2) Example: JP, US, DE, etc. Input the country code for the country where the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 is located (required). Capital letters or 99 can be entered. - Installation Location • Address Input the address where the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 locates. Up to 60 alphanumeric characters can be used. • Building Name Input the building name where the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 is located. Up to 40 alphanumeric characters can be used. - Information filled by Field Engineers • Installation Date Input the date when the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 is installed. Numerals can be used. • Field Engineer E-Mail Address Input the mail address for the field engineer who installed the ETERNUS DX60/ DX80/DX90. Up to 60 alphanumeric characters and symbols can be used. • Customer Code Input the customer code. Up to 8 numerals (including symbols) can be used. 219 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED P2X0-0700-07ENZ0 Chapter 6 Global Settings 6.3 Remote Support • Communication Environment Information - Connection • Connection Type Select the connection method when using the REMCS operation. - Internet Connection - Internet Connection (Mail only) - P-P Connection - P-P Connection (Mail only) - P-P Connection (VPN Connection) - P-P Connection (VPN Connection Mail only) • LAN Port used for Remote Support Select the device LAN port used for REMCS operation from "MNT" or "RMT". - Service • Scheduled Connection Time Input the time for scheduled REMCS connection (required). Numerals can be used. • Scheduled Connection Period Select the term for scheduled REMCS connection (required). - Every Day - Every Day (except Sunday) - Every Day (except Saturday and Sunday) - Once per Week • Specify the Day of the Week When "Once per Week" is selected for "Scheduled Connection Period", select the day of the week for scheduled REMCS connection. - Sunday - Monday - Tuesday - Wednesday - Thursday - Friday - Saturday - Proxy Server • Proxy Server Input the IP address or domain name for the proxy server used for REMCS operation. Up to 63 alphanumeric characters and symbols can be used. • Port No. Input the port number for the proxy server. Numerals between 0 and 65535 can be used. • User Name Input the user name when using the proxy server. Up to 31 ASCII codes (alphanumeric characters and symbols) can be used. • Password Input the password for when using the proxy server. Up to 31 ASCII codes (alphanumeric characters and symbols) can be used. 220 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED P2X0-0700-07ENZ0 Chapter 6 Global Settings 6.3 Remote Support - Storage System E-Mail Configuration • SMTP Server Input the IP address or domain name for the SMTP server used for REMCS operation (required). Up to 63 alphanumeric characters and symbols can be used. • Port No. Input the port number for the SMTP server (required). Numerals between 0 and 65535 can be used. • Sender Mail Address Input an address for mails sent by the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 for REMCS operations (required). Up to 63 alphanumeric characters and symbols can be used. - SMTP Authentication Information • Authentication Type Select the SMTP authentication method. - No SMTP Authentication - POP Before SMTP Authentication - AUTH SMTP Authentication • Authentication Method When the "Authentication Type" is "AUTH SMTP Authentication", specify the Authentication Method. - Automatic - CRAM-MD5 - PLAIN - LOGIN • POP Server When the "Authentication Type" is "POP Before SMTP Authentication", specify the domain name or IP address for the POP server used for SMTP Authentication. Up to 63 alphanumeric characters and symbols can be used. • Port No. Input the port number for the POP server. Numerals between 0 and 65535 can be used. • User Name Input the user name when using the POP server. Up to 31 alphanumeric characters and symbols can be used. • Password Input the password when using the POP server. Up to 31 alphanumeric characters and symbols can be used. 221 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED P2X0-0700-07ENZ0 Chapter 6 Global Settings 6.3 Remote Support - REMCS Center • REMCS Center Select the REMCS center where the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 is connected (required). - Fujitsu America - Australia - Brazil - Hong-Kong - China - Indonesia - Korea - Malaysia - Philippine - Singapore - Taiwan - Thailand - Vietnam - Individual support in Hawaii - OSC - Direct Input Setting • HTTP Server If "Direct Input Setting" is selected for "REMCS Center" field, input the IP address or domain name for the destination HTTP server. Up to 63 alphanumeric characters and symbols can be used. • Port No. Input the port number for the HTTP server specified above. Numerals between 0 and 65535 can be used. • Receiver Mail Address When "Direct Input Setting" is selected, input the E-mail address for the REMCS center specified above as a report destination of the REMCS operation. Up to 63 alphanumeric characters and symbols can be used. • Detailed Configuration Information - Mail Message Fragmentation Setting Select whether to "Enable Message Fragmentation" or "Disable Message Fragmentation" into the specified size. If splitting the mail, specify the units in which to split the mail, between 64 and 6400 (KB). - Specify Storage System Name for HELO/EHLO Announcement when Sending Mail Select whether to "Specify" or "Do not specify" the storage system name for HELO/ EHLP announcement when sending mail. If "Specify" is selected, input the storage system name. Up to 32 alphanumeric characters and symbols can be used. 222 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED P2X0-0700-07ENZ0 Chapter 6 Global Settings 6.3 Remote Support • Time Information This item is not required for setting. If changing the setting values, select the "Change following Timing Parameter items" checkbox. - SMTP Response Timeout (sec.) Input the timeout limit when using SMTP connection. Numerals between 1 and 3600 can be used. - SMTP Retry Count Input the retry number of SMTP. Numerals between 1 and 60 can be used. - SMTP Retry Interval (sec.) Input the intervals for retrying SMTP. Numerals between 1 and 3600 can be used. - HTTP Timeout (sec.) Input the timeout limit when using HTTP connection. Numerals between 1 and 3600 can be used. - HTTP Retry Count Input the retry number of HTTP. Numerals between 1 and 60 can be used. - HTTP Retry Interval (sec.) Input the intervals for retrying HTTP. Numerals between 1 and 3600 can be used. - Queue Time before Sending Mails (msec.) (only when POP Before SMTP authentication is enabled) Input the waiting time for sending mail. Numerals between 1 and 3600 can be used. - [Setup Remote Support] screen (1/5) 223 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED P2X0-0700-07ENZ0 Chapter 6 Global Settings 6.3 Remote Support - [Setup Remote Support] screen (2/5) - [Setup Remote Support] screen (3/5) 224 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED P2X0-0700-07ENZ0 Chapter 6 Global Settings 6.3 Remote Support - [Setup Remote Support] screen (4/5) - [Setup Remote Support] screen (5/5) 225 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED P2X0-0700-07ENZ0 Chapter 6 Global Settings 6.3 Remote Support 3 Click the [Set] button. → A confirmation screen appears. In the following conditions, an error screen appears. • Click the [Set] button without setting the required item (items with "*") • Click the [Set] button with invalid values • When the selected setting information file is not correct • When file format of the selected setting information file is not correct 4 Click the [OK] button. → The specified Remote Support setting is registered. End of procedure After completing the setting, the REMCS center sends the setting result to the specified "Administrator E-Mail Address". Make sure to confirm the settings. 6.3.4 Update Customer Information The [Update Customer Information] function changes the customer information specified in "6.3.3 Setup Remote Support" (page 218). • Customer information saved in the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 can be deleted after transmitting the information to the REMCS center. Select the "Delete any Customer Identity information from the storage system after the information is sent to the "REMCS Center"." and then delete personal information saved in device" checkbox to delete the information. • The Remote Support setting information file (customer information file) created by using REMCS Environment Setup Assist Tool (REMCS ESAT) can be imported to the device, to simplify the input operation required to be set for each device. 226 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED P2X0-0700-07ENZ0 Chapter 6 Global Settings 6.3 Remote Support The procedure to change the customer information is as follows: Procedure 1 Click the [Update Customer Information] under the [Remote Support] menu on the [Global Settings] tab. → The [Update Customer Information] screen appears. 2 Set the customer information again. When importing customer information to the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/ DX90 all at once, click the [Browse...] button to specify the location where the settings file has been stored, and click the [Import] button. - [Update Customer Information] screen (1/2) - [Update Customer Information] screen (2/2) 227 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED P2X0-0700-07ENZ0 Chapter 6 Global Settings 6.3 Remote Support 3 Click the [Set] button. → A confirmation screen appears. 4 Click the [OK] button. → The customer information is changed. End of procedure 6.3.5 Update Communication Environment Information The [Update Communication Environment Information] function changes the communication environment information specified in the "6.3.3 Setup Remote Support" (page 218). The Remote Support setting information file (communication environment information file) created by using REMCS Environment Setup Assist Tool (REMCS ESAT) can be imported to the device, to simplify the input operation required to be set for each device. The procedure to update communication environment information is as follows: Procedure 1 Click the [Update Communication Environment Information] under the [Remote Support] menu on the [Global Settings] tab. → The [Update Communication Environment Information] screen appears. 2 Set the communication environment information again. When importing communication environment information to the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 all at once, click the [Browse...] button to specify the location where the settings file has been stored, and click the [Import] button. 228 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED P2X0-0700-07ENZ0 Chapter 6 Global Settings 6.3 Remote Support - [Update Communication Environment Information] screen (1/3) - [Update Communication Environment Information] screen (2/3) 229 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED P2X0-0700-07ENZ0 Chapter 6 Global Settings 6.3 Remote Support - [Update Communication Environment Information] screen (3/3) 3 Click the [Set] button. → A confirmation screen appears. 4 Click the [OK] button. → The communication environment information is changed. End of procedure 6.3.6 Setup Log Sending Parameters The [Setup Log Sending Parameters] function transfers the internal log to the REMCS center. Select "Configure Automatic Log Transmission" or "Immediately Send Log Manually". • Configure Automatic Log Transmission ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 sends the log automatically. • Immediately Send Log Manually Send log manually. 230 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED P2X0-0700-07ENZ0 Chapter 6 Global Settings 6.3 Remote Support This function is not available in the following conditions: • When "6.3.3 Setup Remote Support" (page 218) is not finished • When a problem is detected in the Remote Support settings • When the "Receiver Mail Address" (REMCS center) is not specified for the Remote Support • When the Remote support function is "Stopping" (refer to "6.3.7 Stop/ Restart Remote Support" (page 233)) The procedure to send log is as follows: Configure Automatic Log Transmission Procedure 1 Click the [Setup Log Sending Parameters] under the [Remote Support] menu on the [Global Settings] tab. → The [Setup Log Sending Parameters] screen appears. 2 Click the [Configure Automatic Log Transmission] link on the left of the screen. 3 Specify the following items, and click the [Set] button. • Send Log based on Events To send logs automatically in the case of a failure, select the "Send" checkbox. • Send Log Periodically To send logs on regular basis. Select the "Enable Periodical Transmission of Log." checkbox, and specify time, period, and day of the week. → A confirmation screen appears. 231 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED P2X0-0700-07ENZ0 Chapter 6 Global Settings 6.3 Remote Support 4 Click the [OK] button. → The send log (Configure Automatic Log Transmission) is performed. End of procedure Immediately Send Log Manually Procedure 1 Click the [Setup Log Sending Parameters] under the [Remote Support] menu on the [Global Settings] tab. → The [Setup Log Sending Parameters] screen appears. 2 Click the [Immediately Send Log Manually] link on the left of the screen. 3 Specify the following items, and click the [Run] button. • Incident Number Specify the incident number of the manually sent log. • Expander Log Collection To obtain the Expander log, select the "Collect" checkbox. • Time Range Specified To specify the time to send log, select the "Specify" checkbox, and specify the start and end time. → A confirmation screen appears. 232 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED P2X0-0700-07ENZ0 Chapter 6 Global Settings 6.3 Remote Support 4 Click the [OK] button. → The send log (Immediately Send Log Manually) operation is performed. End of procedure 6.3.7 Stop/Restart Remote Support The [Stop/Restart Remote Support] function stops or restarts the Remote Support. This function is used for long time suspension such as relocating the system. When suspending the Remote Support function, the device support status is changed from "Operating" to "Stopping". When restarting the Remote Support function, the device support status is changed from "Stopping" to "Operating". When in the "Stopping", all Remote Support functions, such as automatic notification of device errors to the REMCS center, are stopped. • Perform "6.3.3 Setup Remote Support" (page 218) in advance. • This function is not available when the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 is in "Maintenance". • The event of stopping or restarting the Remote Support function is transferred from the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 to the REMCS center. The procedure to stop or restart the Remote Support is as follows: Procedure 1 Click the [Stop/Restart Remote Support] under the [Remote Support] menu on the [Global Settings] tab. → The [Stop/Restart Remote Support] screen appears. 233 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED P2X0-0700-07ENZ0 Chapter 6 Global Settings 6.3 Remote Support 2 Click the [Stop] or [Restart] button. → A confirmation screen appears. 3 Click the [OK] button. → The stopping/restarting Remote Support is performed. End of procedure 234 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED P2X0-0700-07ENZ0 Chapter 6 Global Settings 6.4 System Settings 6.4 System Settings 6.4.1 Modify Date and Time The [Modify Date and Time] function is used to set the time/date and time zone (device location) of the internal clock. The clock is used for checking the internal log and Eco-mode, etc. of the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/ DX90. This function is used when moving the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 to a new installation site, and/or changing the device date/time. The time zone setting is used for Remote Support function. It is possible to set the NTP server to automatically set the time. If an NTP function cannot be used, resetting the time once a month is recommended. • When using Eco-mode, make sure to set the time/date correctly. If the time/date of the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 is wrong, processes used for stopping and starting the disk motor cannot be performed per the Eco-mode schedule. • When using the NTP server, the time modification method is step mode (modify immediately). The procedure to modify date and time is as follows: Procedure 1 Click the [Modify Date and Time] under the [System Settings] menu on the [Global Settings] tab. → The [Modify Date and Time] screen appears. 2 Specify the following items, and click the [Set] button. • Date/Time Information - Current Time Current date and time setting is displayed. - Date To change the "Current Time", input the new date and time. • Time Zone Set the time difference (GMT). - Time Zone Select the Time Zone from the list box. If the appropriate Time Zone does not exist, select "Manually", and specify the time difference using "+" or "-", hour, and minute. • Daylight Saving Time - Set Select whether to set the Daylight Saving Time "ON" or "OFF" with the radio button. - Range If "Set" is "ON", set the Daylight Saving Time period. Select "by day of the week" or "by Date" with the radio button, and input the required parameters. 235 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED P2X0-0700-07ENZ0 Chapter 6 Global Settings 6.4 System Settings When selecting "by day of the week", the "Last" can be selected to specify the start or end week. When selecting "by Date", the "Last Date" can be selected to specify the start or end date. • NTP Service - NTP server Select "NTP enabled" or "NTP disabled" with the radio button. When NTP is enabled, input the IP address or domain name for the NTP server in the text box. ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 is synchronized with the NTP server in a step mode fashion. - LAN Port used for NTP Select the LAN port to be used for NTP connection from "MNT" or "RMT". - Access Status Access state to the NTP server is displayed. → A confirmation screen appears. 3 Click the [OK] button. → The date and time setting is set. End of procedure 236 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED P2X0-0700-07ENZ0 Chapter 6 Global Settings 6.4 System Settings 6.4.2 Modify Storage System Name The [Modify Storage System Name] function is used to set the name, administrator, and installation site of the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Disk storage system. Information registered in this screen is used for the following functions and screens: • Network management using SNMP • Storage system name displayed in logon screen and operation screens • Friendly Name (storage system name)(*1) for Virtual Disk Service (VDS) *1: VDS is a storage management function of the Windows Server®. The procedure to register the storage system name is as follows: Procedure 1 Click the [Modify Storage System Name] under the [System Settings] menu on the [Global Settings] tab. → The [Modify Storage System Name] screen appears. 2 Specify the following items, and click the [Set] button. • Name Specify the storage system name. Between 1 and 16 alphanumeric characters, symbols (except ', (comma)' and '?', and '% used as the first letter'), and blanks can be used. • Installation Location Specify the installation location of the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90. Between 1 and 50 alphanumeric characters, symbols (except ', (comma)' and '?', and '% used as the first letter'), and blanks can be used. • Administrator Specify the system administrator name Between 1 and 50 alphanumeric characters, symbols (except ', (comma)' and '?', and '% used as the first letter'), and blanks can be used. • Description Specify the description of the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90. Between 1 and 50 alphanumeric characters, symbols (except ', (comma)' and '?', and '% used as the first letter'), and blanks can be used. • When changing the storage system name, all the parameters in this menu must be set. • Once a parameter value is specified, the parameter cannot be deleted (values can be changed). 237 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED P2X0-0700-07ENZ0 Chapter 6 Global Settings 6.4 System Settings → A confirmation screen appears. 3 Click the [OK] button. → The specified storage system name is registered. End of procedure 6.4.3 Setup Encryption Mode The [Setup Encryption Mode] function enables or disables encryption mode. When encryption mode is enabled, an encryption buffer is secured in the cache memory of the controller module. 238 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED P2X0-0700-07ENZ0 Chapter 6 Global Settings 6.4 System Settings • When the "Setup Encryption Mode" is not displayed in the menu, the encryption function is not available. • Encryption related functions are only available after enabling encryption mode. • When disabling the encryption mode, reboot the ETERNUS DX60/ DX80/DX90. • The encryption buffer capacity for each controller module (CM0/CM1) is 76MB for ETERNUS DX60, and 230MB for ETERNUS DX80/DX90. • Once encrypted, volumes cannot be changed to non-encrypted volumes. • When disabling the encryption mode, delete all the encrypted volumes and volumes being encrypted in advance. • Encryption function cannot be used under the following conditions: - Encrypted volumes exist - Volumes being encrypted exist - Required cache memory capacity cannot be secured for enabling the encryption mode The procedure to set the encryption mode is as follows: Procedure 1 Click the [Setup Encryption Mode] under the [System Settings] menu on the [Global Settings] tab. → The [Setup Encryption Mode] screen appears. 2 Select whether to "Enable" or "Disable" encryption mode, and click the [Set] button. → A confirmation screen appears. 239 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED P2X0-0700-07ENZ0 Chapter 6 Global Settings 6.4 System Settings 3 Click the [OK] button. → The encryption mode is set. End of procedure 6.4.4 Change Box ID The [Change Box ID] function changes the Box ID that identifies an ETERNUS DX60/DX80/ DX90 in the user system. Box ID is used as information to identify the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 from applications connected to the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90. The initial Box ID is a device ID that is created by combining device information (series name, model, serial number, etc.). If upgrading or replacing the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90, the existing Box ID will change with the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 change. Therefore, there is a risk that the backup data saved in the previous ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 cannot be used, so it is necessary to reconfigure the user system after the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 is upgraded or replaced. This function changes the device BOX ID to the same ID as that of the previous ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 in order to avoid any problems and also use the same backup data in the new device. • A Box ID is a unique name in the user system. Make the Box ID different from that of other ETERNUS Disk storage systems in the user system. If the Box ID is not changed, the Device ID is used as a Box ID. • You cannot change the Box ID during Advanced Copy or RAID migration. The procedure to change Box ID is as follows: Procedure 1 Click the [Change Box ID] under the [System Settings] menu on the [Global Settings] tab. → The [Change Box ID] screen appears. 240 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED P2X0-0700-07ENZ0 Chapter 6 Global Settings 6.4 System Settings 2 Input the Box ID and click the [Set] button. Set the Box ID with 40 characters. The Box ID is fixed at 40 characters. Alphabetic characters (upper case), numerals, hash key characters (#), and blanks can be used. If the input value includes blanks or is less than 40 characters, "#" symbols are added to make the Box ID code 40 digits. In the following conditions, a Box ID cannot be set. • When the entered value of a Box ID is not alphabetic characters (upper case), numerals, blanks, or hash key characters (#) • When the entered value exceeds the maximum number of characters → A confirmation screen appears. 3 Click the [OK] button. → The specified Box ID is registered. End of procedure 241 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED P2X0-0700-07ENZ0 Chapter 6 Global Settings 6.4 System Settings 6.4.5 Setup Power Management The [Setup Power Management] function connects the external input device and controls (shuts down) the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 power. • When using power management function, the AUTO POWER switch (AC power interlock mode) setting as well as GUI setting for ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 is required. Refer to "ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Disk storage system User Guide" for details. • If this function is enabled by mistake, the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 may shut down unexpectedly. The procedure to set the power management is as follows: Procedure 1 Click the [Setup Power Management] under the [System Settings] menu on the [Global Settings] tab. → The [Setup Power Management] screen appears. 2 Specify the following items, and click the [Set] button. • Enable Select the controller module to enable power management by an external input device (both checkbox can be selected at the same time). - CM#0 - CM#1 When the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 has only one CM, CM#1 cannot be selected. • Delay until Shutdown (min.) Set the delay time before starting shutdown after receiving a battery low signal between 0 and 15 (minutes). • Set management unit interface Select the device connecting via RS232C interface. The "Manual" setting is for particular use, thus should not be used during normal operation. - Power Synchronized Unit - PMAN - Manual • Power Failure Signal Select the signal logic for power failure signal when the power failure occurs (Positive: positive logic, Negative: negative logic). • Low Battery Signal Select the signal logic for a low battery signal when a low battery charge occurs (Positive: positive logic, Negative: negative logic). 242 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED P2X0-0700-07ENZ0 Chapter 6 Global Settings 6.4 System Settings • UPS Shutdown Signal When enabling the UPS shutdown signal, select the "Enable" checkbox. Also, select the signal logic for UPS shutdown signal (Positive: positive logic, Negative: negative logic). → A confirmation screen appears. 3 Click the [OK] button. → The power management setting is set. End of procedure 6.4.6 Setup Subsystem Parameters The [Setup Subsystem Parameters] function changes the subsystem parameters in order to control ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 operation when it is connected to hosts. The ETERNUS DX60/ DX80/DX90 operates according to the set subsystem parameters, for all the hosts to be connected. • Do not change the setting after installing the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/ DX90, unless a maintenance engineer instructs otherwise. • To set the subsystem parameters using this function, set them after stopping all host access. 243 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED P2X0-0700-07ENZ0 Chapter 6 Global Settings 6.4 System Settings The procedure to set the subsystem parameters are as follows: Procedure 1 Click the [Setup Subsystem Parameters] under the [System Settings] menu on the [Global Settings] tab. → The [Setup Subsystem Parameters] screen appears. 2 Specify the following item, and click the [Set] button. • Load Balance Set whether to enable the load balance for the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90. Select the checkbox to enable the load balance. When the load balance is enabled and the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 is overloaded, the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 answers the sense specified in the "Load Balance Response" field of the [Setup Host Response] function. If the load balance is disabled, the warning sense response is suppressed and the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 does not answer the sense of any host connecting to the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90. • Load balance for all hosts is disabled when the "Load Balance" checkbox is cleared. If the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/ DX90 is in overload in this status, the warning sense response is suppressed. • When connecting the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 and HPUX hosts, clear (disable) the "Load Balance" checkbox. If the "Load Balance" checkbox is selected (enabled), incorrect logs may be recorded in the host. • Load balancing by Multipath Driver is operated regardless if the "Load Balance" is enabled/disabled. • Reject INQUIRY from Unauthorized Host Select whether to reject the "Inquiry" command from an unauthorized host. Select the checkbox to reject the "Inquiry" command from an unauthorized host. When rejecting the command, the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 returns an Affinity Error (5/25/81) for the "Inquiry" command from the unauthorized host. When not rejecting the command, the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 responds normally. When using the VERITAS Volume Manager Dynamic Multipathing (VxVM DMP), select the checkbox. • Checkcode Enforcement Set whether to enable the Checkcode Enforcement mode. Select the checkbox to enable the mode. When enable this mode, the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 enhances the error detection function. When write I/O for user-data is duplicated, the checkcodes of all the data blocks are checked. 244 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED P2X0-0700-07ENZ0 Chapter 6 Global Settings 6.4 System Settings • Internal Bus Recovery Set whether to enable the Internal Bus Recovery mode. Select the checkbox to enable the mode. When enable this mode, the ETERNUS DX80/DX90 resets the internal bus to recover from internal errors. Note that the Fibre Channel connection is lost for a few seconds during this process (For 8Gbit/s FC models only). → A confirmation screen appears. 3 Click the [OK] button. → The subsystem parameters are set. 6.4.7 Setup Event Notification The [Setup Event Notification] function selects whether to report events detected in the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90. There are four methods for event notification: E-Mail, SNMP Trap, Host Sense, and REMCS. For E-Mail notification, performing "6.2.5 Setup E-Mail Notification" (page 210) is required. For SNMP Trap notification, performing "6.2.2 Setup SNMP Agent" (page 203) is required. For REMCS for event notification, performing "6.3.3 Setup Remote Support" (page 218) is required. A notification setting can be selected for each type of event. When selecting REMCS for event notification, only the REC related error event settings can be changed. Note that REMCS field is not displayed for the ETERNUS DX60/DX80. 245 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED P2X0-0700-07ENZ0 Chapter 6 Global Settings 6.4 System Settings The procedure to set the event notification is as follows: Procedure 1 Click the [Setup Event Notification] under the [System Settings] menu on the [Global Settings] tab. → The [Setup Event Notification] screen appears. 2 Select whether or not to report for each event type. The events are classified into three levels: "Error Severity Level", "Warning Level", and "Informational Level". Click the link on the left of the screen to display the setting fields for each level. Some notification methods cannot be selected depending on the event type. • Setting based on Severity Select whether to notify of an event by levels. When enabling the notification, select the method from "E-Mail", "SNMP Trap", "Host Sense Key Code Qualifier", or "REMCS" (for ETERNUS DX90) (multiple selections can be made). When setting the notification method for each event, move on to the setting fields for each level. - All Error Events Select whether to notify when an error level event occurs. When notifying, select the notification method. - All Warning Events Select whether to notify when a warning level event occurs. When notifying, select the notification method. - All Informational Events Select whether to notify when a informational level event occurs. When notifying, select the notification method. - Individual Settings within Severity Level "Yes" is displayed when the target notification method ("E-Mail", "SNMP Trap", "Host Sense Key Code Qualifier", or "REMCS" (for ETERNUS DX90)) is specified for any event in "Error Severity Level", "Warning Level", or "Information Level", if not, "No" is displayed. 246 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED P2X0-0700-07ENZ0 Chapter 6 Global Settings 6.4 System Settings • Error Severity Level Select whether to notify of the error event for each event type. "Remote Path Error", "REC Buffer Halt (Path Error)", "REC Buffer Halt (Overload)", and "REC Buffer Halt (Error)" are displayed only when using the ETERNUS DX90. When enabling the notification, select the method from "E-Mail", "SNMP Trap", "Host Sense Key Code Qualifier", or "REMCS" (for ETERNUS DX90) (multiple selections can be made). - Disk was broken Select whether to notify when a disk failure occurs. When notifying, select the notification method. - Broken Disk (when HS<0) Select whether to notify when a disk failure occurs but no hot spare disk is registered. When notifying, select the notification method. - Module was broken Select whether to notify when a module failure occurs. When notifying, select the notification method. - Remote Path Error Select whether to notify when an REC path error occurs. When notifying, select the notification method. - REC Buffer Halt (Path Error) Select whether to notify when an REC buffer halt caused by REC path error occurs. When notifying, select the notification method. - REC Buffer Halt (Overload) Select whether to notify when an REC buffer halt caused by overload occurs. When notifying, select the notification method. - REC Buffer Halt (Error) Select whether to notify when an REC buffer halt caused by an error occurs. When notifying, select the notification method. - Copy Session Error Select whether to notify when a copy session error (Error Suspend or Halt) occurs. When notifying, select the notification method. 247 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED P2X0-0700-07ENZ0 Chapter 6 Global Settings 6.4 System Settings • Warning Level Select whether to notify of a warning event for each event type. When enabling the notification, select the method from "E-Mail", "SNMP Trap", "Host Sense Key Code Qualifier", or "REMCS" (for ETERNUS DX90) (multiple selections can be made). - Disk reported a Warning Select whether to notify when a warning level event occurs in the disk. When notifying, select the notification method. - Warning Disk (when HS<0) Select whether to notify when a warning level event occurs in the disk but no hot spare disk is registered. When notifying, select the notification method. - Module reported a Warning Select whether to notify when a warning level event occurs in the module. When notifying, select the notification method. - RAID Degradation Event Select whether to notify when a RAID degradation event occurs. When notifying, select the notification method. - RAID Degradation Event (when HS<0) Select whether to notify when a RAID degradation event occurs but no hot spare disk is registered. When notifying, select the notification method. - RAID Recovery Event Select whether to notify when a degraded RAID group is recovered. When notifying, select the notification method. - Recovery from Error Select whether to notify when recovered from an error status. When notifying, select the notification method. - Blink Panel Fault LED Select "Enable" when setting the Fault LED in the front panel to blink while a warning level event occurs, and select "Disable" when setting the Fault LED not to blink. 248 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED P2X0-0700-07ENZ0 Chapter 6 Global Settings 6.4 System Settings • Informational Level Select whether to notify of an information event for each event type. When notification is enabled, select the method from "E-Mail" or "SNMP Trap" (both settings can be selected). - Power on Completed Select whether to notify when the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 startup has completed. When notifying, select the notification method. - Controller Firmware updated Select whether to notify when the controller firmware has been updated. When notifying, select the notification method. - Created RAID Group Select whether to notify when the RAID group has been created. When notifying, select the notification method. - Deleted RAID Group Select whether to notify when the RAID group has been deleted. When notifying, select the notification method. - RAID Group Name Changed Select whether to notify when the RAID group name has been changed. When notifying, select the notification method. - Assigned Hot Spare Select whether to notify when the hot spare has been registered. When notifying, select the notification method. - Released Hot Spare Select whether to notify when the hot spare has been released. When notifying, select the notification method. - Created Volume Select whether to notify when the volume has been created. When notifying, select the notification method. - Deleted Volume Select whether to notify when the volume has been deleted. When notifying, select the notification method. 249 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED P2X0-0700-07ENZ0 Chapter 6 Global Settings 6.4 System Settings - Volume Name Changed Select whether to notify when the volume name has been changed. When notifying, select the notification method. - FC / iSCSI / SAS Port Parameters Changed Select whether to notify when the port parameters have been changed. When notifying, select the notification method. Displayed content varies depending on the model type. - FC / iSCSI / SAS Host Information Changed Select whether to notify when the host information has been changed. When notifying, select the notification method. Displayed content varies depending on the model type. - Host Name Defined Select whether to notify when the host name has been defined. When notifying, select the notification method. - LUN Mapping Changed Select whether to notify when the LUN mapping has been changed. When notifying, select the notification method. - Host Response Changed Select whether to notify when the host response has been changed. When notifying, select the notification method. - Reset Group Changed Select whether to notify when the reset group has been changed. When notifying, select the notification method. - Error condition defined by SDP policy Select whether to notify when an error level event occurs in the SDP policy. When notifying, select the notification method. - Warning condition defined by SDP policy Select whether to notify when a warning level event occurs in the SDP policy. When notifying, select the notification method. - Informational message defined by SDP policy Select whether to notify when an informational level event occurs in the SDP policy. When notifying, select the notification method. 250 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED P2X0-0700-07ENZ0 Chapter 6 Global Settings 6.4 System Settings Threshold of SDP policy level can be specified with "5.4.4 Modify Copy Parameters" (page 156) function. 3 Click the [Set] button. → A confirmation screen appears. 4 Click the [OK] button. → The specified event notification setting is enabled. End of procedure 251 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED P2X0-0700-07ENZ0 Chapter 6 Global Settings 6.5 Host I/F Management 6.5 Host I/F Management Host I/F Management provides the following host connection related functions. • Set Port Parameters • Setup Host • Setup Host Response • Modify Reset Group ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 can relate the Logical Unit Number (LUN) of the host to volumes in the device, and set or limit the volume that is recognized from the host. Host Affinity relates the LUN and volume to each interface port connected in the host. ● When using Host Affinity function The [Host I/F Management] is used when connecting multiple servers via a switch. The server recognizes the affinity group specified for each Host Bus Adapter (HBA). By restricting the volumes can be recognized from each server, security improvement is expected. The following shows a basic concept for affinity group. Apply Affinity Group #00 for the access from HBA#A (=Server A) and HBA#B (=Server B) Restrict the server that can be accessed per port ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 LUN#0 Switch : Server A HBA#A LUN#127 Affinity Group #00 Port LUN#0 Volume#0 : : LUN#127 Volume#127 LUN#0 Affinity Group #01 : Server B HBA#B LUN#0 Volume#128 LUN#127 : : LUN#127 Volume#255 Port LUN#0 : Server C HBA#C LUN#127 Apply Affinity Group #01 for the access from HBA#C(=Server C) 252 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED P2X0-0700-07ENZ0 Chapter 6 Global Settings 6.5 Host I/F Management ● When Host Affinity function is not used When the host affinity function is not used, the server recognizes the volume related to LUN in each ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 port. This method is suitable for connecting the server and ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 directly. The following shows a basic concept when the same volume is LUN mapped to each port. LUN#0 = Volume#0 : LUN#127 = Volume#127 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 LUN#0 Port : Server A Volume#0 LUN#127 : Volume#127 LUN#0 Port : Server B LUN#127 : Server A and Server B recognize the Volume#0 as LUN#0 LUN#0 = Volume#0 : LUN#127 = Volume#127 The following shows a basic concept when different volumes are LUN mapped to each port. LUN#0 = Volume#0 : LUN#127 = Volume#127 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Server A recognizes Volume#0 as LUN#0 LUN#0 : Server A Volume#0 Port : LUN#127 Volume#127 Volume#128 LUN#0 : Server B Port :: Volume#255 LUN#127 Server B recognizes Volume#128 as LUN#0 LUN#0 = Volume#128 : LUN#127 = Volume#255 253 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED P2X0-0700-07ENZ0 Chapter 6 Global Settings 6.5 Host I/F Management 6.5.1 Set Port Parameters The [Set Port Parameters] function sets the connecting information for ports to connect to the server. There are three types of host interfaces; FC, iSCSI, and SAS. Procedures to set port parameters vary depending on the host interface types. When the Host Affinity function is enabled, use the [Setup Host] function to set the host response for each host. When the Host Affinity function is disabled, use the [Set Port Parameters] function to set the host response for each port. For details, refer to "ETERNUS DX Disk storage systems User’s Guide Server Connection-" for each operating system. Set FC Port Parameters The [Set FC Port Parameters] function sets the connection information between the FC port of the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 and host, or connection information between the local and remote devices (FC port parameters). • For ETERNUS DX90 There are two types of port modes; CA, used for connecting to the host, and RA, which is used for REC. Use the procedure described in "5.4.8 Modify Port Mode" (page 184) to change port the mode. • For ETERNUS DX60/DX80 Only the CA port mode is available. The setting items vary depending on the port mode. The procedure to set FC port parameters is as follows: Procedure 1 Click the [Set FC Port Parameters] under the [Host I/F Management] menu on the [Global Settings] tab. → The [Set FC Port Parameters] screen appears. 2 Specify the following items, and click the [Set] button. - When the port mode is "CA" • Port Select the target port. • Port Mode Port mode for the target port is displayed. • Connection Select the connection method for the target port from the "Fabric" or "FC-AL". When "FC-AL" is selected, it is necessary to assign a Loop ID to the port. • Set Loop ID When the "Connection" is "FC-AL", select "Manual" or "Auto" to specify the Loop ID. 254 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED P2X0-0700-07ENZ0 Chapter 6 Global Settings 6.5 Host I/F Management • Loop ID When the "Set Loop ID" is "Auto", select "Ascending" or "Descending". When the "Set Loop ID" is "Manual", specify the Loop ID (last 2 digits of 0x00 to 0x7D). • Transfer Rate (Gbit/s) Select the transfer speed of the target port from the following: - For 4Gbit/s models • Auto Negotiation • 1 • 2 • 4 - For 8Gbit/s models • Auto Negotiation • 2 • 4 • 8 • Frame Size (bytes) Select the frame size of the target port according to the destination server or switch (2048, 1024, or 512). • Host Affinity Select whether to "Enable" or "Disable" the Host Affinity function for the target port. Select "Enable" when restricting access to volumes for each server (when connecting via switches). Select "Disable" when restricting access to volumes for each port (when connecting directly to the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90). When connecting multiple servers and the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 directly and restricting access to volumes for each server, enable the Host Affinity setting. • Host Response When the "Host Affinity" is "Disabled", select the host response to allocate to the target port. - 0:Default The initial pattern is displayed. Sense information is not converted. - Host Response (Number:Name) Identification number of the host response registered in the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/ DX90 is displayed. When the host response name is registered, it is also displayed. • Reset Scope Select the reset scope from "I_T_L" or "T_L". Reset scope is the range where the command reset request from the server is performed, when the port is connected to multiple servers. - I_T_L (I: Initiator, T: Target, L: LUN) Reset (cancel) the command request from the server that sent the command reset request. - T_L (T: Target, L: LUN) Reset (cancel) the command request from all servers that are connected to the port (regardless of whether the LUN is recognized). • Release Reservation if Chip is Reset Select whether to "Enable" or "Disable" the function to release the volume's reserved status when the target port (chip) is in Reset status. 255 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED P2X0-0700-07ENZ0 Chapter 6 Global Settings 6.5 Host I/F Management - When the port mode is "RA" • Port Select the target port. • Port Mode Port mode for the target port is displayed. • Connection Select the connection method for the target port from the "Fabric" or "FC-AL". When "FC-AL" is selected, it is necessary to assign a Loop ID to the port. • Set Loop ID When the "Connection" is "FC-AL", select "Manual" or "Auto" to specify the Loop ID. • Loop ID When the "Set Loop ID" is "Manual", specify the Loop ID (last 2 digits of 0x00 to 0x7D). When the "Set Loop ID" is "Auto", select "Ascending" or "Descending". • Transfer Rate (Gbit/s) Select the transfer speed of the target port from the following: - Auto Negotiation - 2 - 4 - 8 256 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED P2X0-0700-07ENZ0 Chapter 6 Global Settings 6.5 Host I/F Management Clicking the [Copy] button displays the screen for selecting the copy destination port. The port parameters are copied to the selected port. Note that copy can be performed between ports that have the same port mode. → A confirmation screen appears. 3 Click the [OK] button. → The FC port parameters are set. End of procedure Set iSCSI Port Parameters The [Set iSCSI Port Parameters] function sets the connection information between the iSCSI port of the ETERNUS DX60/DX80 and host (iSCSI port parameters). • Each port must have a unique IP address. The same IP address cannot be set again in the ETERNUS DX60/DX80. • An iSCSI name is a unique name in the ETERNUS DX60/DX80. The same iSCSI name cannot be specified for multiple iSCSI ports. However, the same iSCSI name has been specified for all ports by default (only the default value can be same). When these name must be recognized separately, change the iSCSI names. For multipath connection, iSCSI names must be changed. 257 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED P2X0-0700-07ENZ0 Chapter 6 Global Settings 6.5 Host I/F Management The procedure to set iSCSI port parameters is as follows: Procedure 1 Click the [Set iSCSI Port Parameters] under the [Host I/F Management] menu on the [Global Settings] tab. → The [Set iSCSI Port Parameters] screen appears. 2 Specify the following items, and click the [Set] button. • Port Select the target port. • IP Address Specify the IP address (0 to 255) for the target port (required). Click the [Test Connection (ping)] button to display the [Send ping Command] screen. Specify the IP address of the connection destination device whose connection status is to be checked and number of execution, and click the [Send] button. Sending the "ping" command enables you to check whether the IP address is allocated correctly, and connection path to the destination device is normal. • Subnet Mask Set the subnet mask (0 to 255) for the target port (required). • Default Gateway Set the IP address (0 to 255) for the default gateway. • iSNS Server Select wether to use the iSNS server in the target port. When "Enable" is selected, specify the IP address (0 to 255) for the iSNS server. Internet Storage Name Service (iSNS) is almost equivalent to Domain Name System (DNS) for the Internet. iSNS server is used to convert the iSCSI name to the IP address on the iSCSI network. • iSCSI Name Set the iSCSI name for the target port. Between 4 and 223 alphanumeric characters and symbols (’- (hyphen)’, ’: (colon)’, ’. (period)’) can be used. Click the [Default] button to set the default iSCSI name. An iSCSI name is a unique name in the ETERNUS DX60/DX80. The same iSCSI name cannot be set to multiple iSCSI ports except the device iSCSI name. • Alias Name Set the alias name for the target port. Between 1 and 31 alphanumeric characters and symbols (including blanks) can be used. While the iSCSI name is a formal nomenclature that specifies the target iSCSI port, an alias name is used as nickname. 258 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED P2X0-0700-07ENZ0 Chapter 6 Global Settings 6.5 Host I/F Management • Host Affinity Select whether to "Enable" or "Disable" the Host Affinity function for the target port. Select "Enable" when restricting access to volumes for each server (when connecting via switches). Select "Disable" when restricting access to volumes for each port (when connecting directly to the ETERNUS DX60/DX80). When connecting multiple servers and the ETERNUS DX60/DX80 directly and restricting access to volumes for each server, enable the Host Affinity setting. • Host Response When the "Host Affinity" is "Disabled", select the host response to allocate to the target port. - 0:Default The initial pattern is displayed. Sense information is not converted. - Host Response (Number:Name) Identification number of the host response registered in the ETERNUS DX60/DX80 is displayed. When the host response name is registered, it is also displayed. • Jumbo Frame Select wether to enable or disable the Jumbo Frame. Select "Enable" when using the Jumbo Frame to transfer data via the target port. When not using the Jumbo Frame, select "Disable". Enabling Jumbo Frame increases the amount of data to be transferred per Frame, making data transfer more efficient. Confirm that the connected device (*1) supports the Jumbo Frame before enabling the Jumbo Frame. *1: When the ETERNUS DX60/DX80 and server are connected directly, this indicates that the connected device is a server side LAN card (NIC). When the ETERNUS DX60/DX80 and server are connected via a switch, this indicates that the connected device is a switch. • Transfer Rate Select the transfer speed of the target port from the following: - Auto Negotiation - 100Mbit/s - 1Gbit/s Note that since the ETERNUS DX60/DX80 iSCSI port does not support the Half-Duplex mode, the connected device (*1) must be set as follows. Transfer speed of the ETERNUS DX60/DX80 *1: Transfer speed of the connected device (*1) Auto Negotiation Auto Negotiation 100Mbit/s 100Mbit/s (Full) 1Gbit/s 1Gbit/s When the ETERNUS DX60/DX80 and server are connected directly, this indicates that the connected device is a server side LAN card (NIC). When the ETERNUS DX60/DX80 and server are connected via a switch, this indicates that the connected device is a switch. 259 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED P2X0-0700-07ENZ0 Chapter 6 Global Settings 6.5 Host I/F Management • Reset Scope Select the reset scope from "I_T_L" or "T_L". Reset scope is the range where the command reset request from the server is performed, when the port is connected to multiple servers. - I_T_L (I: Initiator, T: Target, L: LUN) Reset (cancel) the command request from the server that sent the command reset request. - T_L (T: Target, L: LUN) Reset (cancel) the command request from all servers that are connected to the port (regardless of whether the LUN is recognized). • Release Reservation if Chip is Reset Select whether to "Enable" or "Disable" the function to release the volume's reserved status when the target port (chip) is in Reset status. • CHAP Select "ON" when enabling CHAP authentication for the target port. To disable, select "OFF". For CHAP authentication, an encrypted password based on a random key that the ETERNUS DX60/DX80 receives from the host is sent, and connection possibility is judged on the server side. • CHAP User Name When "ON" is selected for "CHAP", specify the user name that accesses the target port. Between 1 and 255 characters of alphanumeric characters and symbols (including blanks) can be used. This setting is required when CHAP authentication is used. Make sure to set the user name and password in pairs. • Change CHAP Password When changing the CHAP password, select the checkbox. This checkbox can only be selected when "ON" is selected for "CHAP" and the password has already been set. • Password Specify the password for the currently specifying "Chap User Name". • New Password When "ON" is elected for "CHAP", specify the password that accesses the target port. Between 12 and 100 alphanumeric characters and symbols (including blanks) can be used. Make sure to set the user name and password in pairs. • Confirm new Password Input the same character strings as the value entered in the "New Password" field for confirmation. • Header Digest Select "OFF" when not adding Header Digest of the target port. When adding, select "CRC32C". Header Digest is a check code to be added to the header part of the iSCSI port detailed information. Specify "CRC32C" when the host requests to add the check code. "CRC32C" is algorithmic to create a check code. • Data Digest Select "OFF" when not adding Data Digest of the target port. When adding, select "CRC32C". Data Digest is a check code to be added to the data area of the iSCSI port detailed information. Specify "CRC32C" when the host requests to add the check code. "CRC32C" is algorithmic to create a check code. 260 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED P2X0-0700-07ENZ0 Chapter 6 Global Settings 6.5 Host I/F Management • [Set iSCSI Port Parameters] screen (1/2) • [Set iSCSI Port Parameters] screen (2/2) → A confirmation screen appears. 3 Click the [OK] button. → The iSCSI port parameters are set. End of procedure 261 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED P2X0-0700-07ENZ0 Chapter 6 Global Settings 6.5 Host I/F Management Set SAS Port Parameters The [Set SAS Port Parameters] function sets the connection information between the SAS port of the ETERNUS DX60/DX80 and host (SAS port parameters). The procedure to set SAS port parameters is as follows: Procedure 1 Click the [Set SAS Port Parameters] under the [Host I/F Management] menu on the [Global Settings] tab. → The [Set SAS Port Parameters] screen appears. 2 Specify the following items, and click the [Set] button. • Port Select the target port. • Host Affinity Select whether to "Enable" or "Disable" the Host Affinity function for the target port. Select "Enable" when restricting access to volumes for each server. Select "Disable" when restricting access to volumes for each port. When connecting multiple servers and the ETERNUS DX60/DX80 directly and restricting access to volumes for each server, enable the Host Affinity setting. • Host Response When the "Host Affinity" is "Disabled", select the host response to allocate to the target port. - 0:Default The initial pattern is displayed. Sense information is not converted. - Host Response (Number:Name) Identification number of the host response registered in the ETERNUS DX60/DX80 is displayed. When the host response name is registered, it is also displayed. • Reset Scope Select the reset scope from "I_T_L" or "T_L". Reset scope is the range where the command reset request from the server is performed, when the port is connected to multiple servers. - I_T_L (I: Initiator, T: Target, L: LUN) Reset (cancel) the command request from the server that sent the command reset request. - T_L (T: Target, L: LUN) Reset (cancel) the command request from all servers that are connected to the port (regardless of whether the LUN is recognized). • Release Reservation if Chip is Reset Select whether to "Enable" or "Disable" the function to release the volume's reserved status when the target port (chip) is in Reset status. 262 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED P2X0-0700-07ENZ0 Chapter 6 Global Settings 6.5 Host I/F Management → A confirmation screen appears. 3 Click the [OK] button. → The SAS port parameters are set. End of procedure 6.5.2 Setup Host The [Setup Host] function registers the HBA information to the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90. By registering HBA information, access to the volumes in the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 is restricted, and connections from servers with unregistered hosts are not allowed (when the Host Affinity function is enabled). There are three types of host interfaces; FC, iSCSI, and SAS. The required setting varies depending on the host interface type. • Host setting is not needed when the Host Affinity function is not used. • When deleting the currently running host, the access from the target host must be stopped. To set a new host, it is not necessary to stop host access. • When deleting host information, the settings for the affinity group and LUN mapping that are associated with the host must be disabled in advance. • When using the Host Affinity functions, make sure to "Enable" the Host Affinity setting of the port using the [Set Port Parameters] function. 263 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED P2X0-0700-07ENZ0 Chapter 6 Global Settings 6.5 Host I/F Management For details, refer to "ETERNUS DX Disk storage systems User’s Guide Server Connection-" for each operating system. Setup FC Host The [Setup FC Host] function registers the FC information of the HBAs installed in the FC host to be connected to the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90. Up to 16 FC hosts (HBAs) per port can be connected for ETERNUS DX60. For ETERNUS DX80/DX90, up to 32 FC hosts per port can be connected. The procedures to set the FC Host (register) are as follows: Procedure 1 Click the [Setup FC Host] under the [Host I/F Management] menu on the [Global Settings] tab. → The [Setup FC Host] screen appears. 2 Click the [Add] button. → The "Add New FC Host" field is displayed. 264 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED P2X0-0700-07ENZ0 Chapter 6 Global Settings 6.5 Host I/F Management When changing or deleting the FC host settings, select the target FC host in the "Registered FC Host List" field, and click the [Edit] or [Delete] button. When deleting all the registered FC hosts, click the [Delete All] button. 3 Specify the following items, and click the [Add] button. • FC Port The list of FC port existing in the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 is displayed. When a fibre channel switch is connected to the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90, settings between the fibre channel switch and server (FC host) must be completed in advance. When using an ETERNUS DX90, ports in which the port mode is "CA" are displayed in the FC Port field. Refer to "5.4.8 Modify Port Mode" (page 184) for details about port mode. • WWN Select the WWN, or directly input a WWN (required). 16 capital letters and numerals can be used. • Name Specify the FC host name (required). Between 1 and 16 alphanumeric characters, symbols (except ', (comma)' and '?', and '% used as the first letter'), and blanks can be used. • Host Response Specify the host response for the target host (required). 265 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED P2X0-0700-07ENZ0 Chapter 6 Global Settings 6.5 Host I/F Management → The target FC host is added in the "Registered FC Host List". To add multiple FC hosts, repeat the procedure for all the FC hosts to be added. 4 After registering all the FC hosts, click the [Done] button. 266 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED P2X0-0700-07ENZ0 Chapter 6 Global Settings 6.5 Host I/F Management 5 Click the [Set] button. → A confirmation screen appears. 6 Click the [OK] button. → The FC host is set (registered). End of procedure 267 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED P2X0-0700-07ENZ0 Chapter 6 Global Settings 6.5 Host I/F Management Setup iSCSI Host The [Setup iSCSI Host] function registers the iSCSI information of the Host Bus Adapters (HBAs) installed in the SAS host to be connected to the ETERNUS DX60/DX80. For iSCSI connection, configure the server as an iSCSI initiator (the host that sends commands), and the ETERNUS DX60/DX80 as an iSCSI target (the device that executes the commands). Authentication is performed using the iSCSI name in each session between an initiator and target. CHAP Authentication, which matches the user name and password, can be performed in this phase. Up to 16 iSCSI hosts (HBAs) per port can be connected for ETERNUS DX60. For ETERNUS DX80, up to 32 iSCSI hosts per port can be connected. The procedures to set the iSCSI Host (register) are as follows: Procedure 1 Click the [Setup iSCSI Host] under the [Host I/F Management] menu on the [Global Settings] tab. → The [Setup iSCSI Host] screen appears. 2 Click the [Add] button. When the IP address of the iSCSI host is not specified (0.0.0.0 is specified), "*" is displayed in the "IP Address" field of the "Registered iSCSI Host List". → The "Add New iSCSI Host" field is displayed. 268 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED P2X0-0700-07ENZ0 Chapter 6 Global Settings 6.5 Host I/F Management When changing or deleting the iSCSI host settings, select the target iSCSI host in the "Registered iSCSI Host List" field, and click the [Edit] or [Delete] button. When deleting all the registered iSCSI hosts, click the [Delete All] button. 3 Specify the following items, and click the [Add] button. • iSCSI Port The list of iSCSI port existing in the ETERNUS DX60/DX80 is displayed. • iSCSI Name Select the iSCSI Name, or directly input the iSCSI Name (required). Between 4 and 223 alphanumeric characters and symbols can be used. The iSCSI Name cannot be obtained automatically in the following conditions: • The [Discover] button is inactivated • When "Disable" is selected for the "iSNS server" in the "Set iSCSI Port Parameters" • IP Address Specify the IP address of the iSCSI host. When the IP address is not used for registering the host, this item is not required. • Name Specify the iSCSI Host Name (required). Between 1 and 16 alphanumeric characters, symbols (except ', (comma)' and '?', and '% used as the first letter'), and blanks can be used. • Host Response Specify the host response for the target host (required). • Alias Name Specify the alias name for the iSCSI host. Up to 31 alphanumeric characters and symbols can be used. • CHAP User Name Specify the user name to access the target host. Between 0 and 255 alphanumeric characters and symbols can be used. This setting is not needed when CHAP authentication is not used. 269 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED P2X0-0700-07ENZ0 Chapter 6 Global Settings 6.5 Host I/F Management • CHAP Password Specify the password to access the target host. Between 12 and 100 alphanumeric characters and symbols can be used. Make sure to set the user name and password in pairs. • Confirm CHAP Password Input the same character strings as the value entered in the "CHAP Password" field for confirmation. → The target iSCSI host is added in the "Registered iSCSI Host List". To add multiple iSCSI hosts, repeat the procedure for all the iSCSI hosts to be added. 4 After registering all the iSCSI hosts, click the [Done] button. 270 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED P2X0-0700-07ENZ0 Chapter 6 Global Settings 6.5 Host I/F Management 5 Click the [Set] button. → A confirmation screen appears. 6 Click the [OK] button. → The iSCSI host is set (registered). End of procedure Setup SAS Host The [Setup SAS Host] function registers the SAS information of the Host Bus Adapters (HBAs) installed in the SAS host to be connected to the ETERNUS DX60/DX80. Up to one SAS host (HBAs) per port can be connected. The procedures to set the SAS Host (register) are as follows: Procedure 1 Click the [Setup SAS Host] under the [Host I/F Management] menu on the [Global Settings] tab. → The [Setup SAS Host] screen appears. 271 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED P2X0-0700-07ENZ0 Chapter 6 Global Settings 6.5 Host I/F Management 2 Click the [Add] button. → The "Add New SAS Host" field is displayed. When changing or deleting the SAS host settings, select the target SAS host in the "Registered SAS Host List" field, and click the [Edit] or [Delete] button. When deleting all the registered SAS hosts, click the [Delete All] button. 272 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED P2X0-0700-07ENZ0 Chapter 6 Global Settings 6.5 Host I/F Management 3 Specify the following items, and click the [Add] button. • SAS Port The list of SAS port existing in the ETERNUS DX60/DX80 is displayed. • SAS Address Select the SAS address, or directly input a SAS address (required). 16 capital letters and numerals can be used. • Name Specify the SAS Host Name (required). Between 1 and 16 alphanumeric characters, symbols (except ', (comma)' and '?', and '% used as the first letter'), and blanks can be used. • Host Response Specify the host response for the target host (required). → The target SAS host is added in the "Registered SAS Host List". To add multiple SAS hosts, repeat the procedure for all the SAS hosts to be added. 273 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED P2X0-0700-07ENZ0 Chapter 6 Global Settings 6.5 Host I/F Management 4 After registering all the SAS hosts, click the [Done] button. 5 Click the [Set] button. → A confirmation screen appears. 274 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED P2X0-0700-07ENZ0 Chapter 6 Global Settings 6.5 Host I/F Management 6 Click the [OK] button. → The SAS host is set (registered). End of procedure 6.5.3 Setup Host Response The [Setup Host Response] function adds, changes, and/or deletes the Host Response settings, which is the information added to the response to the server. By specifying the correct host response, it prevents the following conditions: • Server cannot recognize the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 when connecting • Server cannot take appropriate measures against an ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 error For more details about setting the Host Response for each OS type, refer to "ETERNUS DX Disk storage systems User’s Guide -Server Connection-". • If the Host Response is not changed, the default pattern provided by the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 is assigned. • If a host response item is in use by a port or host, release it from the port or host (by associating them with the default host response) before editing or deleting the host response. • Up to 256 Host Responses can be set. The target to be assigned to the Host Response varies depending on whether the Host Affinity function is used or not used. • When the Host Affinity function is used. Set the Host Response per server HBA (Refer to "6.5.2 Setup Host" (page 263)). • When the Host Affinity function is not used. Set the Host Response per port (Refer to "6.5.1 Set Port Parameters" (page 254)). The procedure to add the host response is as follows: Procedure 1 Click the [Setup Host Response] under the [Host I/F Management] menu on the [Global Settings] tab. → The [Setup Host Response] screen appears. 275 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED P2X0-0700-07ENZ0 Chapter 6 Global Settings 6.5 Host I/F Management 2 Click the [Add] button. → The "Edit Host Response" field is displayed. When changing or deleting the Host Response, select the target Host Response from the tree in the left of screen or target Host Response listed in the "Host Response List" field, and click the [Edit] or [Delete] button. When deleting all the registered Host Responses, click the [Delete All] button. 276 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED P2X0-0700-07ENZ0 Chapter 6 Global Settings 6.5 Host I/F Management 3 Specify the following items, and click the [OK] button. By clicking the button in the "Preset" field, the default host response settings for each host environment can be specified. • [Windows - msdsm] button Changes the setting to the value recommended for connecting to Windows hosts where Microsoft Device Specific Module (DSM) has been installed. • [Linux - devicemapper] button Changes the setting to the value recommended for connecting to Linux hosts where device-mapper-multipath has been installed. • [Solaris - MPxIO] button Changes the setting to the value recommended for connecting to Solaris hosts where MPxIO has been installed. • [VMware - ESX4] button Changes the setting to the value recommended for connecting to VMware hosts where VMware vSphere 4 (ESX 4.0) has been installed. • [VMware - ESX3.5] button Changes the setting to the value recommended for connecting to VMware hosts where VMware Infrastructure 3 (ESX 3.5 or ESXi 3.5) has been installed. • [Egenera - PAN manager] button Changes the setting to the value recommended for connecting to Egenera hosts where PAN manager has been installed. • Response No. Host response identification number is displayed. • Response Name Specify the host response name. Between 1 and 16 alphanumeric characters, symbols (except ', (comma)' and '?', and '% used as the first letter'), and blanks can be used. • Byte-0 of Inquiry Response Set the value for Byte-0 of the "Inquiry" command from "No Conversion (Default)" or "Custom". After the link between the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 and the host is established, the host sends an "Inquiry" command to check the status of the volumes for a certain period of time. Specify the Byte-0 of the Inquiry data to respond this "Inquiry" command. Byte-0 in the Inquiry data indicates the volume status. - No Conversion (Default) Responds with the value specified in the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90. - Custom When the Byte-0 is "0x20 (configuration is available, unformatted)", converts the Byte-0 value to "0x7f (configuration is not available)" and responds. 277 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED P2X0-0700-07ENZ0 Chapter 6 Global Settings 6.5 Host I/F Management • Inquiry VPD ID Type Set the Vital Product Data (VPD) information type to respond to the host. VPD information includes the device information (Vender ID, Product ID for each model, volume number, etc.) for the volume. Type1 and Type3 indicate the data format. - Type1 + Type3 (Default) - Type1 - Type3 • Inquiry Standard Data Version Specify the Standard Data Version (version number of the SCSI standard) of the "Inquiry" command. - Version 5 (Default) - Version 4 - Version 3 • Command Timeout Interval Select the setting method for the command timeout interval from the following items. - Default (25sec.) - Customize When "Customize" is selected, input a value between 10 and 255 seconds (numeric). • Load Balance Response This field sets the response status when an overload-derived timeout is detected. The server retry reaction is determined by this setting. While the default response should be compatible with all systems, the setting may be changed as required by any problems that occur. Contact your maintenance engineer to change the setting. - [Disable] Unit Attention (Default) - [Disable] Busy - [Disable] Queue Full • Reservation Conflict Response for Test Unit Ready Select whether to notify or not notify the Reservation Conflict to the "Test Unit Ready" command when volumes from the other host are reserved. - Normal (Default) - Conflict • Change Volume Mapping Select whether to "No Report (Default)" or "Report" to the host when a volume that can be accessed from the host is added or deleted. • Volume Capacity Expansion Select whether to "No Report (Default)" or "Report" to the host when the capacity of a volume is changed. • Vendor Unique Sense Code Select whether to "No Report (Default)" or "Report" the vendor unique sense code to the host. Vendor Unique Sense indicates the unique sense code for each vendor that is not coincident with host I/O. 278 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED P2X0-0700-07ENZ0 Chapter 6 Global Settings 6.5 Host I/F Management • Host Specific Mode Set the operation for specific host. - Normal (Default) - AIX Mode Select this to prevent the command initialization and performance degradation. - HP-UX Mode Select this to recognize volumes with more than 8LU(s). • Asymmetric / Symmetric Logical Unit Access Select the access type from the host to Logical Unit. - ACTIVE-ACTIVE / PREFERRED_PATH (Default) - ACTIVE / ACTIVE • Unrecoverable Sense Report Mode Set the sense report mode for events that are unrecoverable even when an I/O retry has been performed. This item is enabled only when "Linux Recommended (When not using GRMPD)" for "Sense Data Conversion" is selected. - Disable (Default) Sense reports to the host operate normally regardless of the status. - Enable Unnecessary I/O retries by the host are prevented when unrecoverable events occur even when an I/O retry has been performed. • Sense Data Conversion Select the sense code conversion pattern. - No Conversion (Default) - Linux Recommended (When not using GRMPD) Select this pattern to prevent malfunction of Linux hosts for which GR Multipath Driver has not been installed. - Windows Recommended (When not using GR/ETERNUS MPD or Device Driver) Select this pattern to prevent malfunction of Windows® hosts for which GR/ ETERNUS Multipath Driver, or Device Driver have not been installed. - Customize This setting is displayed only when the special sense conversion pattern is specified. Settings can be checked in the "SK/ASC/ASCQ". • SK/ASC/ASCQ This field is displayed when "Customize" is selected for the "Sense Data Conversion". - SK: Sense Key - ASC: Additional Sense Code - ASCQ: Additional Sense Code Qualifier 279 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED P2X0-0700-07ENZ0 Chapter 6 Global Settings 6.5 Host I/F Management - [Setup Host Response] screen (1/4) - [Setup Host Response] screen (2/4) 280 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED P2X0-0700-07ENZ0 Chapter 6 Global Settings 6.5 Host I/F Management - [Setup Host Response] screen (3/4) - [Setup Host Response] screen (4/4) 4 Click the [Set] button. → A confirmation screen appears. 5 Click the [OK] button. → The new host response is added. End of procedure 281 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED P2X0-0700-07ENZ0 Chapter 6 Global Settings 6.5 Host I/F Management 6.5.4 Modify Reset Group The [Modify Reset Group] sets the reset group to switch the path for some servers. A reset group is a setting that groups multiple ports that will be reset. If a host is unable to access the volumes in a port, this function releases the volumes reserved by the inaccessible port to the ports in the specified reset group, without affecting other ports. The reset group setting sets this range for each port. When a 2-port configuration server (including duplication) using the same volume cannot be accessed, it is possible to access the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 from the opposite port (standby side). The port for the paths that access the same volume must be grouped in the same reset group. Even if the server is different, ports accessing the same volume must be set in the same reset group. • When a port is shared by multiple servers using the "5.3.10 Configure LUN Mapping" (page 131) function, only volumes that are included in the LUN mapping assigned to the target server in the Host Affinity setting are subject to release. • One port cannot be registered in multiple reset groups. • When using the ETERNUS DX90, ports whose port mode is "RA" cannot be selected as a grouping target port. For more details on which server is necessary to set/change the reset group, refer to "ETERNUS DX Disk storage systems User’s Guide -Server Connection-" for each OS type. 282 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED P2X0-0700-07ENZ0 Chapter 6 Global Settings 6.5 Host I/F Management The procedure to set the reset group is as follows: Procedure 1 Click the [Modify Reset Group] under the [Host I/F Management] menu on the [Global Settings] tab. → The [Modify Reset Group] screen appears. 2 Select the port that belongs to the same reset group, and click the [Set] button. → A confirmation screen appears. 283 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED P2X0-0700-07ENZ0 Chapter 6 Global Settings 6.5 Host I/F Management 3 Click the [OK] button. → The reset group is set. End of procedure 284 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED P2X0-0700-07ENZ0 Chapter 7 Maintenance This chapter describes maintenance related operations. 7.1 Hot Expansion This function can expand the components without stopping device operation. The device needs expansion of components to the original configuration in order to enhance performance, increase the number of available volumes, or increase the number of connected hosts. Disks and drive enclosures can be expanded in hot mode. Disks can be expanded in hot mode by physical installation in the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90. This operation does not require GUI operation. ● The maximum number of disks and drive enclosures The following explains the maximum number of disks and drive enclosures that can be installed in each model. Model Disk Drive enclosure ETERNUS DX60 24 1 ETERNUS DX80/DX90 120 (*1) 9 *1: Up to nine SSDs can be installed in the ETERNUS DX80/DX90. • The expanded disks can be used after registering in the RAID group or as hot spare disks. • When the maximum number of parts set for each model has already been installed, the parts cannot be expanded. • When adding two or more disks, install disks one by one after an interval (of approximately 30 seconds). Confirm that the status LED of the expanded disk glows green, then add the next disks. • Be sure to use authorized expansion parts. If parts other than the expansion parts are used, operation is not guaranteed. • When encryption is in progress, disk expansion is not available. Perform the disk expansion operation after completing the encryption process. • Only one drive enclosure can be added at once. To add multiple drive enclosures, repeat the procedure for all the drive enclosures to be added. Refer to "4.1 Storage System Status" (page 44) for component status display. 285 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED P2X0-0700-07ENZ0 Chapter 7 Maintenance 7.1 Hot Expansion 7.1.1 Add Drive Enclosure The [Add Drive Enclosure] function can expand the drive enclosure while the ETERNUS DX60/ DX80/DX90 is operating. If expansion fails due to an error or problem, the expansion can be restarted from the interrupted point by starting this function again and recovering the failed expansion parts. However, when disk operation is not normal, maintenance is required. The procedure to add a drive enclosure in hot mode is as follows: Procedure 1 Click the [Add Drive Enclosure] under the [Hardware Maintenance] menu on the [Maintenance] tab. → The [Add Drive Enclosure] screen appears. 2 Click the [Next >] button. → The procedure to add DE is displayed. 286 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED P2X0-0700-07ENZ0 Chapter 7 Maintenance 7.1 Hot Expansion 3 Install the drive enclosure in the rack according to the displayed procedure, and click the [Next >] button. → The expanded components identification process starts. 287 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED P2X0-0700-07ENZ0 Chapter 7 Maintenance 7.1 Hot Expansion 4 Confirm the "Auto Power" switch for the target drive enclosure is "OFF", and click the [Next >] button. → The [Add Drive Enclosure] procedure is completed. 5 Click the [OK] button. End of procedure 288 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED P2X0-0700-07ENZ0 Chapter 8 Display and Download Information (Diagnosis) This chapter describes how to display and download ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 related information. 8.1 Display Event Log The [Display Event Log] function records and displays the event history of the ETERNUS DX60/ DX80/DX90 as an event log. The event log is one of the internal logs stored in the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90. The event log contains a history of events that are related to set the information changes, such as module failures and volume creation. Up to 800 (400 per a CM) event logs can be displayed. Once the recorded event log is no longer necessary, it can also be deleted. Even after deleting internal logs using the "8.2 Export/Delete Log" (page 290) function, the event log remains in the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90. The procedure to display the event log is as follows: Procedure 1 Click the [Display Event Log] menu on the [Diagnosis] tab. → The [Display Event Log] screen appears. 289 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED P2X0-0700-07ENZ0 Chapter 8 Display and Download Information (Diagnosis) 8.2 Export/Delete Log • Click the [Delete] button to delete the event log. • Click the [Refresh] button to obtain the latest event log. • Daylight saving time is applied for the date and time, and "DST" is displayed for the logs of events that occur during the daylight saving time period that is specified in "6.4.1 Modify Date and Time" (page 235). End of procedure 8.2 Export/Delete Log The [Export/Delete Log] function exports and saves the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 maintenance information (log) according to user-specified time. An exported log can be stored on a floppy disk or hard disk, or sent by mail. Also users can select a log segment size in accordance with save destination. ● The maintenance information to be exported Logs include an internal log and setup information. • Internal log Detected errors, warnings, and traces. • Setup information The setup information exported from the device. • The internal log and setup information cannot be exported separately. The procedure to export log information is as follows: Procedure 1 Click the [Export/Delete Log] menu on the [Diagnosis] tab. → The [Export/Delete Log] screen appears. 2 Set the following items and click the [Export] button. • Specify Time Range Select whether to specify the time range with "Yes" or "No", or select the "Last 24 hours" radio button. • Start Time When a time range is to be specified, specify the date and time to start exporting logs. • End Time When a time range is to be specified, specify the date and time to end exporting logs. • Include Expander log Select whether to export the Expander log with the "Yes" or "No" radio button. 290 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED P2X0-0700-07ENZ0 Chapter 8 Display and Download Information (Diagnosis) 8.2 Export/Delete Log • Log File Size Select the log segment size when saving the exported log. - Non-segmentation - 4.27MB - 1.44MB (Floppy Disk) - 640KB (E-Mail) • Delete of Customer Information Select whether to delete the customer information with the "Yes" or "No" radio button. In the following conditions, an error screen appears. • When the input date and/or time are not valid (For example: February 31st) • When the end time is earlier than the start time → A confirmation screen appears. 3 Click the [OK] button. → The log is exported. After exporting log completes, a dialog box to download the log file appears. 291 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED P2X0-0700-07ENZ0 Chapter 8 Display and Download Information (Diagnosis) 8.2 Export/Delete Log 4 Click the [Download] button to save the exported log. After exporting the log completes, save the log file immediately. 5 Save the log file. • Take care so that the segments are not overwritten. • When exporting segmented log files, make sure to export the segment within five minutes. If five minutes passes before exporting the next segment, exporting the log fails. After saving one segment is finished, save the next segment immediately. → If the log file is segmented, download and save the next segment (save all the segmented files). When "Non-segmentation" is selected in the "Log File Size" field, the [Download] button described in Step 4 becomes inactive after the save process of the log file completes. 6 Click the [Finish] button. → Exporting log is completed. After exporting the log completes, make sure to perform "8.3 Export Panic Dump" (page 293). End of procedure 292 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED P2X0-0700-07ENZ0 Chapter 8 Display and Download Information (Diagnosis) 8.3 Export Panic Dump 8.3 Export Panic Dump "Panic Dump" is the action of outputting (dump) memory information when an error (panic) occurs, and also the name of the output information itself. This function exports and saves the memory information of the controller that is stored in the panic dump data, in a segment size specified by the user. An exported panic dump can be stored on a floppy disk or hard disk, or sent by mail. Panic dump data is used to analyze the cause of a firmware abnormality or hardware error. • This function cannot be used when there is no panic dump to be exported in the device. • Two panic dumps are stored per CM, and four per device. When all four panic dumps in the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 are stored within the last 14 days, a new panic dump cannot be saved. The procedure to export panic dump is as follows: Procedure 1 Click the [Export Panic Dump] menu on the [Diagnosis] tab. → The [Export Panic Dump] screen appears. 293 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED P2X0-0700-07ENZ0 Chapter 8 Display and Download Information (Diagnosis) 8.3 Export Panic Dump 2 Set the following items, and click the [Export] button. • Panic Dumps Select panic dump to be exported from the list displayed in the screen. • Option - Dump File Segment Size Select the dump file segment size to save the obtained panic dump. • Non-segmentation • 4.27MB • 1.44MB (Floppy Disk) • 640KB (E-Mail) → A confirmation screen appears. 3 Click the [OK] button. → The selected panic dump is exported. After the panic dump export is finished, a screen to execute saving the panic dump is displayed. 294 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED P2X0-0700-07ENZ0 Chapter 8 Display and Download Information (Diagnosis) 8.3 Export Panic Dump 4 Click the [Download] button to save the exported panic dump. When exporting a panic dump file is finished, save the panic dump file. 5 Save the panic dump. → When the panic dump file is segmented, download and save the next segment (save all the segmented files). • Take care so that the segments are not overwritten. • When exporting segmented panic dump files, make sure to export the segment within five minutes. If five minutes passes before exporting the next segment, exporting the panic dump fails. After saving one segment is finished, save the next segment immediately. When "Non-segmentation" is selected in the "Dump File Segment Size" field, the [Download] button described in Step 4 becomes inactive after the save process of the panic dump file completes. End of procedure 295 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED P2X0-0700-07ENZ0 Chapter 8 Display and Download Information (Diagnosis) 8.4 Start/Stop Performance Monitoring 8.4 Start/Stop Performance Monitoring GUI contains a function that acquires performance information and displays the result. The [Start/Stop Performance Monitoring] function is used to start/stop acquiring the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 performance information. Acquired information can be checked using the "8.5 Display Performance Information" (page 299) function. • When the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 is rebooted, monitoring performance process is stopped. • When other monitoring software, such as ETERNUS SF Storage Cruiser, is controlling performance information, performance information cannot be acquired using GUI. The procedure to start/stop acquiring performance information is as follows: Start Performance Monitoring Procedure 1 Click the [Start/Stop Performance Monitoring] menu on the [Diagnosis] tab. → The [Start/Stop Performance Monitoring] screen appears. 2 Specify the following item, and click the [Start] button. • Monitoring State Current status of performance information acquisition operation is displayed. • Interval (sec.) Input the interval to acquire the performance information between 30 and 300 (sec.) in units of 30 seconds. → A confirmation screen appears. 296 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED P2X0-0700-07ENZ0 Chapter 8 Display and Download Information (Diagnosis) 8.4 Start/Stop Performance Monitoring 3 Click the [OK] button. → Acquisition of performance information is started. End of procedure Stop Performance Monitoring Procedure 1 Click the [Start/Stop Performance Monitoring] menu on the [Diagnosis] tab. → The [Start/Stop Performance Monitoring] screen appears. 2 Click the [Stop] button. → A confirmation screen appears. 297 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED P2X0-0700-07ENZ0 Chapter 8 Display and Download Information (Diagnosis) 8.4 Start/Stop Performance Monitoring 3 Click the [OK] button. → Acquisition of performance information is stopped. End of procedure 298 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED P2X0-0700-07ENZ0 Chapter 8 Display and Download Information (Diagnosis) 8.5 Display Performance Information 8.5 Display Performance Information The [Display Performance Information] function displays performance information related to the Host I/O, Advanced Copy, disks, CM, and host port, which is obtained by the Master CM in advance. By collecting the CM (CPU) usage rate in the device and busy ratio of the disk, operating conditions and work load in the device can be checked. The performance information acquisition operation must be started by using the "8.4 Start/Stop Performance Monitoring" (page 296) function or other monitoring software (such as ETERNUS SF Storage Cruiser) in advance. The procedure to display the performance information is as follows: Procedure 1 Click the [Display Performance Information] menu on the [Diagnosis] tab. → The [Display Performance Information] menu appears. Click the tree view on the left of the screen to display information for each component. • Click the [Save] button to save the performance information. • Click the [Refresh] button to obtain the latest information. End of procedure 299 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED P2X0-0700-07ENZ0 Chapter 8 Display and Download Information (Diagnosis) 8.6 Display Error Information 8.6 Display Error Information The [Display Error Information] function displays the total number of errors for disks and ports. An increasing number of error occurrences in the information is used to indicate early replacement of warning status components, and for analysis information when performance degradation occurs. Also, deleting unnecessary disk error information can be deleted. The procedure to display error information is as follows: Procedure 1 Click the [Display Error Information] menu on the [Diagnosis] tab. → The [Display Error Information] screen appears. Click the link on the left of the screen, and display the [Disk Error Statistics] screen and [Port Error Statistics] screen. - Disk Error Statistics • The [Clear Statistics] targeting checkboxes are only provided for disks with error information. To clear the error information for each disk, select the checkbox for the target disk and click the [Clear Statistics] button. • To clear the error information for all the disks, click the [Clear All Statistics] button. • Click the [Refresh] button to obtain the latest information. 300 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED P2X0-0700-07ENZ0 Chapter 8 Display and Download Information (Diagnosis) 8.6 Display Error Information - Port Error Statistics End of procedure 301 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED P2X0-0700-07ENZ0 Appendix A Install Site Certificate This chapter describes how to install the web-site certificate. This chapter provides an example of when using Internet Explorer and Firefox. A.1 For Internet Explorer This section describes the procedure to install security certificate. The procedure to install security certificate for Internet Explorer 7 is as follows: When using Internet Explorer 8, register the URL of the ETERNUS DX60/ DX80/DX90 in "Trusted Sites" before installing the security certificate. Use the Internet Option and specify the URL to be used for connecting to the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 (https://IP address of the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90) to the "Trusted Sites". Procedure 1 Enter the URL to the address bar in the web browser. Specify "https://IP address of the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90" (Default IP address is "192.168.1.1"). → A confirmation screen for security certificate appears. 302 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED P2X0-0700-07ENZ0 Appendix A Install Site Certificate A.1 For Internet Explorer 2 Click the "Continue to this website (not recommended)" link. → The logon screen for GUI is displayed. 3 Click the "Certificate Error". → A warning message appears. 303 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED P2X0-0700-07ENZ0 Appendix A Install Site Certificate A.1 For Internet Explorer 4 Click the "View Certificates" link. → The site certificate information appears. 5 Click the [Install Certificate] button. → The "Certificate Import Wizard" appears. 6 Click the [Next >] button. 304 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED P2X0-0700-07ENZ0 Appendix A Install Site Certificate A.1 For Internet Explorer 7 Select "Place all certificates in the following store". → The "Select Certificate Store" screen appears. If "Automatically select the certificate store based on the type of certificate" is selected in the "Certificate Import Wizard", an error may occur in the security certificate according to the customer environment. 8 Select the "Trusted Root Certification Authorities", and click the [OK] button. 9 Click the [Finish] button. → The "Security Warning" dialog box appears. 305 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED P2X0-0700-07ENZ0 Appendix A Install Site Certificate A.1 For Internet Explorer 10 Click the [Yes] button. After clicking the [No] button, the operation may not be continuable. If this occurs, restart the web browser. → The completion screen appears. 11 Click the [OK] button. → The security certificate is installed. Restart the web browser. End of procedure 306 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED P2X0-0700-07ENZ0 Appendix A Install Site Certificate A.2 For Firefox A.2 For Firefox This section provides the procedure to install the security certificate. The example when installing security certificate for Firefox 3.0.8 is as follows: Procedure 1 Enter the URL to the address bar in the web browser. Specify "https://IP address of the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90" (Default IP address is "192.168.1.1"). → A confirmation screen for security certificate appears. 2 Click the "Or you can add an exception..." link. 307 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED P2X0-0700-07ENZ0 Appendix A Install Site Certificate A.2 For Firefox 3 Click the [Add Exception...] button. → The [Add Exception] screen appears. 4 Click the [Get Certificate] button. → The status of certificate is displayed. 308 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED P2X0-0700-07ENZ0 Appendix A Install Site Certificate A.2 For Firefox 5 Click the [Confirm Security Exception] button. → The security certificate is installed. Restart the web browser. End of procedure 309 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED P2X0-0700-07ENZ0 Appendix B Factory Default List The following shows the factory default settings. Item Contents Setting value Setting range Set Eco-mode Schedule Eco-mode General Setting Eco-mode Disable Modify Copy Parameters Policy Level 1 (Informational) of Snap Data Pool Threshold (%) 50 1 − 97 Policy Level 2 (Warning) of Snap Data Pool Threshold (%) 70 2 − 98 Policy Level 3 (Error) of Snap Data Pool Threshold (%) 99 3 − 99 Modify EC/ OPC Priority EC/OPC Priority Automatic Priority • Enable • Disable • Automatic Priority • High Priority • Low Priority Modify Copy Table Size Advanced Copy feature enabled On • On • Off Copy Table Size x1 • • • • • Resolution Table Size (MB) Create Copy Path Modify Port Mode Select Copy Path Set Line x1 x2 x4 x8 x16 ETERNUS DX60 0 0 − 64 (MB) ETERNUS DX80/DX90 0 0 − 128 (MB) Connection Type Direct Link Speed (Mbit/s) 0 1 − 65535 (Mbit/s) Compression Ratio (%) 0 0 − 99 (%) Port Mode CA • Remote • Direct • CA • RA 310 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED P2X0-0700-07ENZ0 Appendix B Factory Default List Item Contents Setup User Account User Role Advanced Standard Setup Network Environment Interface Speed and Duplex Setting value Setting range User Name f.ce 4 − 16 alphanumeric characters and symbols ('!', '-', '_', '.') Password Check code + Serial No. (default) 4 − 16 alphanumeric characters and symbols ('!', '-', '_', '.') User Name root 4 − 16 alphanumeric characters and symbols ('!', '-', '_', '.') Password root 4 − 16 alphanumeric characters and symbols ('!', '-', '_', '.') MNT Auto Negotiation • Auto Negotiation • • • • • RMT Auto Negotiation 1Gbit/s 100Mbit/s Half 100Mbit/s Full 10Mbit/s Half 10Mbit/s Full • Auto Negotiation • • • • • 1Gbit/s 100Mbit/s Half 100Mbit/s Full 10Mbit/s Half 10Mbit/s Full Master CM IP Address MNT 192.168.1.1 0 − 255 RMT 0.0.0.0 0 − 255 Slave CM IP Address MNT 0.0.0.0 0 − 255 RMT 0.0.0.0 0 − 255 Subnet Mask MNT 255.255.255.0 0 − 255 RMT 0.0.0.0 0 − 255 Default Gateway MNT 0.0.0.0 0 − 255 RMT 0.0.0.0 0 − 255 Primary DNS MNT 0.0.0.0 0 − 255 RMT 0.0.0.0 0 − 255 Secondary DNS MNT 0.0.0.0 0 − 255 RMT 0.0.0.0 0 − 255 311 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED P2X0-0700-07ENZ0 Appendix B Factory Default List Item Contents Setup Network Environment Interface http https telnet SSH Maintenance Maintenance -Secure ICMP Allowed IP List IP Address Subnet Mask Setup SNMP Agent (Basic Interface) Set Basic Interface Setting value Setting range MNT Enable • Enable • Disable RMT Enable • Enable • Disable MNT Enable • Enable • Disable RMT Enable • Enable • Disable MNT Enable • Enable • Disable RMT Enable • Enable • Disable MNT Enable • Enable • Disable RMT Enable • Enable • Disable MNT Enable • Enable • Disable RMT Enable • Enable • Disable MNT Disable • Enable • Disable RMT Disable • Enable • Disable MNT Enable • Enable • Disable RMT Enable • Enable • Disable MNT 0.0.0.0 0 − 255 RMT 0.0.0.0 0 − 255 MNT 0.0.0.0 0 − 255 RMT 0.0.0.0 0 − 255 SNMP Function Disable • Enable • Disable LAN Port used for SNMP MNT • MNT • RMT Authentication Failure Send SNMP Trap • Send SNMP Trap • Do not send SNMP Trap 312 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED P2X0-0700-07ENZ0 Appendix B Factory Default List Item Contents Setup SNMP Agent (Basic Interface) Set Basic Interface Setup E-Mail Notification Notification E-Mail Notification Setting range • Notification • Not notification Mail Server Settings Retry Setting Setup Remote Support Setting value Abnormal parts during maintenance Communication Environment Information Notification E-Mail Disable Destination E-Mail Address − LAN Port used for SMTP Connection MNT Sender E-Mail Address − SMTP Server − SMTP Port No. 25 SMTP requires authentication None User Name − Password − Authentication Method Automatic • Enable • Disable Up to five addresses • MNT • RMT 1 − 65535 • None • AUTH SMTP • • • • Automatic CRAM-MD5 PLAIN LOGIN Maximum Retries 0 0 or 1 Retry Interval (sec.) 1 0 − 5 (sec.) Connection Internet Connection Connection Type • Internet Connection • Internet Connection (Mail only) • P-P Connection • P-P Connection (Mail only) • P-P Connection (VPN Connection) • P-P Connection (VPN Connection Mail only) LAN Port used for Remote Support MNT • MNT • RMT 313 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED P2X0-0700-07ENZ0 Appendix B Factory Default List Item Setup Remote Support Contents Communication Environment Information Service Setting value Scheduled Connection Time Undefined (10:00 - 15:00) Scheduled Connection Period Every Day Setting range 00:00 − 23:59 (*1) • Every Day • Every Day (except Sunday) • Every Day (except Saturday and Sunday) • Once per Week Specify the Day of the Week Proxy Server Storage System E-Mail Configuration SMTP Authentication Information Sunday • • • • • • • Sunday Monday Tuesday Wednesday Thursday Friday Saturday Proxy Server − Up to 63 alphanumeric characters and symbols Port No. 0 0 − 65535 (numerals) SMTP Server − Up to 63 alphanumeric characters and symbols Port No. 25 0 − 65535 (numerals) Sender Mail Address − Up to 63 alphanumeric characters and symbols Authentication Type No SMTP Authentication • No SMTP Authentication • POP Before SMTP Authentication • AUTH SMTP Authentication Authentication Method Automatic • • • • Automatic CRAM-MD5 PLAIN LOGIN 314 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED P2X0-0700-07ENZ0 Appendix B Factory Default List Item Setup Remote Support Contents SMTP Authentication Information REMCS Center Setting value Setting range POP Server − Up to 63 alphanumeric characters and symbols Port No. 0 0 − 65535 (numerals) REMCS Center REMCS Center • Fujitsu America • • • • • • • • • • • • • Australia Brazil Hong-Kong China Indonesia Korea Malaysia Philippine Singapore Taiwan Thailand Vietnam Individual support in Hawaii • OSC • Direct Input Setting Detailed Configuration Information HTTP Server − Up to 63 alphanumeric characters and symbols Port No. 0 0 − 65535 (numerals) Receiver Mail Address − Up to 63 alphanumeric characters and symbols Mail Message Fragmentation Setting Enable Message Fragmentation • Enable Message Fragmentation • Disable Message Fragmentation 64 Specify Storage System Name for HELO/EHLO Announcement when Sending Mail Do not specify − 64 − 6400 (KB) • Specify • Do not specify Up to 32 alphanumeric characters and symbols 315 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED P2X0-0700-07ENZ0 Appendix B Factory Default List Item Setup Remote Support Setup Log Sending Parameters Contents Time Information Configure Automatic Log Transmission Setting value Change following Timing Parameter items Not selected SMTP Response Timeout (sec.) 60 Setting range • Selected • Not selected 1 − 3600 (numerals) SMTP Retry Count 5 1 − 60 SMTP Retry Interval (sec.) 30 1 − 3600 (numerals) HTTP Timeout (sec.) 30 1 − 3600 (numerals) HTTP Retry Count 5 1 − 60 HTTP Retry Interval (sec.) 5 1 − 3600 (numerals) Queue Time before Sending Mails (msec.) (only when POP Before SMTP authentication is enabled) 1000 1 − 3600 (numerals) Send Log based on Events Send Log when Errors Occur Send • Send • Not selected Send Log Periodically Enable Periodical Transmission of Log. Selected • Selected • Not selected Time Undefined (10:00 - 15:00) 00:00 − 23:59 (*1) Period Once per Week • Every Day • Once per Week Day of the Week Setup Event Notification Setting based on Severity All Error Events Undefined (any day from Monday to Friday) (*1) Selected Select from Monday to Fri day. • E-Mail • SNMP Trap • Host Sense Key Code Qualifier • REMCS All Warning Events Selected • E-Mail • SNMP Trap • Host Sense Key Code Qualifier All Informational Events Not selected • E-Mail • SNMP Trap 316 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED P2X0-0700-07ENZ0 Appendix B Factory Default List Item Setup Event Notification Contents Error Severity Level Disk was broken Setting value Selected Setting range • E-Mail • SNMP Trap • Host Sense Key Code Qualifier Broken Disk (when HS<0) Not selected • E-Mail • SNMP Trap • Host Sense Key Code Qualifier Module was broken Selected • E-Mail • SNMP Trap • Host Sense Key Code Qualifier Remote Path Error Selected • E-Mail • SNMP Trap • Host Sense Key Code Qualifier • REMCS REC Buffer Halt (Path Error) Selected • E-Mail • SNMP Trap • REMCS REC Buffer Halt (Overload) Selected • E-Mail • SNMP Trap • REMCS REC Buffer Halt (Error) Selected • E-Mail • SNMP Trap • REMCS Copy Session Error Not selected • E-Mail • SNMP Trap • REMCS 317 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED P2X0-0700-07ENZ0 Appendix B Factory Default List Item Setup Event Notification Contents Warning Level Disk reported a Warning Setting value Selected Setting range • E-Mail • SNMP Trap • Host Sense Key Code Qualifier Warning Disk (when HS<0) Not selected • E-Mail • SNMP Trap • Host Sense Key Code Qualifier Module reported a Warning Selected • E-Mail • SNMP Trap • Host Sense Key Code Qualifier RAID Degradation Event Selected • E-Mail • SNMP Trap • Host Sense Key Code Qualifier RAID Degradation Event (when HS<0) Not selected • E-Mail • SNMP Trap • Host Sense Key Code Qualifier RAID Recovery Event Selected • Host Sense Key Code Qualifier Recovery from Error Not selected • SNMP Trap Blink Panel Fault LED Enable • Enable • Disable 318 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED P2X0-0700-07ENZ0 Appendix B Factory Default List Item Setup Event Notification Contents Informational Level Setting value Setting range Power on Completed Not selected • E-Mail • SNMP Trap Controller Firmware updated Not selected • E-Mail • SNMP Trap Created RAID Group Not selected • E-Mail • SNMP Trap Deleted RAID Group Not selected • E-Mail • SNMP Trap RAID Group Name Changed Not selected • E-Mail • SNMP Trap Assigned Hot Spare Not selected • E-Mail • SNMP Trap Released Hot Spare Not selected • E-Mail • SNMP Trap Created Volume Not selected • E-Mail • SNMP Trap Deleted Volume Not selected • E-Mail • SNMP Trap Volume Name Changed Not selected • E-Mail • SNMP Trap FC/iSCSI/SAS Port Parameters Changed Not selected • E-Mail • SNMP Trap FC/iSCSI/SAS Host Information Changed Not selected • E-Mail • SNMP Trap Host Name Defined Not selected • E-Mail • SNMP Trap LUN Mapping Changed Not selected • E-Mail • SNMP Trap Host Response Changed Not selected • E-Mail • SNMP Trap Reset Group Changed Not selected • E-Mail • SNMP Trap Error condition defined by SDP policy Not selected • E-Mail • SNMP Trap Warning condition defined by SDP policy Not selected • E-Mail • SNMP Trap Informational message defined by SDP policy Not selected • E-Mail • SNMP Trap 319 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED P2X0-0700-07ENZ0 Appendix B Factory Default List Item Modify Date and Time Contents Time Zone Setting value Setting range Depending on the factory settings • (GMT-12:00) Eniwetok, Kwajalein • (GMT-11:00) Samoa • (GMT-10:00) Honolulu • (GMT-09:00) Alaska • (GMT-08:00) Los Angeles, San Francisco, San Diego • (GMT-07:00) Phoenix, Calgary, Denver • (GMT-06:00) Chicago, Mexico City • (GMT-05:00) New York, Bogota • (GMT-04:00) Caracas • (GMT-03:30) Newfoundland • (GMT-03:00) Sao Paulo, Brasilia • (GMT-02:00) Mid-Atlantic • (GMT-01:00) Azores Island, Cape Verde • (GMT+00:00) Dublin, London, Manchester, Lisbon • (GMT+01:00) Paris, Madrid, Stockholm • (GMT+01:00) Rome, Vienna, Berlin • (GMT+01:00) Milan, Amsterdam 320 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED P2X0-0700-07ENZ0 Appendix B Factory Default List Item Modify Date and Time Contents Time Zone Setting value Setting range Depending on the factory settings • (GMT+02:00) Athens, Helsinki, Cairo • (GMT+02:00) Beirut, Cape Town • (GMT+03:00) Nairobi, Moscow • (GMT+04:00) Abu Dhabi • (GMT+05:00) Islamabad, Karachi • (GMT+05:30) New Delhi • (GMT+06:00) Dhaka • (GMT+07:00) Bangkok, Jakarta • (GMT+08:00) Hong Kong, Manila, Singapore • (GMT+08:00) Beijing, Taipei, Kuala Lumpur, Perth • (GMT+09:00) Tokyo, Osaka, Kyoto, Fukuoka, Sapporo • (GMT+09:00) Seoul • (GMT+09:30) Adelaide • (GMT+10:00) Guam, Sydney, Melbourne • (GMT+11:00) Solomon Islands, New Caledonia • (GMT+12:00) Wellington, Auckland, Fiji • Manually 321 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED P2X0-0700-07ENZ0 Appendix B Factory Default List Item Modify Date and Time Modify Storage System Name Contents Setting value Setting range Daylight Saving Time Depending on the factory settings • ON • OFF NTP Service NTP server Depending on the factory settings • NTP enabled • NTP disabled LAN Port used for NTP Depending on the factory settings • MNT • RMT Name − 1 − 16 alphanumeric characters, symbols (except ',' and '?', and '% used as the first letter'), and blanks Installation Location − 1 − 50 alphanumeric characters, symbols (except ',' and '?', and '% used as the first letter'), and blanks Administrator − 1 − 50 alphanumeric characters, symbols (except ',' and '?', and '% used as the first letter'), and blanks Description − 1 − 50 alphanumeric characters, symbols (except ',' and '?', and '% used as the first letter'), and blanks Set the Name of this Storage System Setup Encryption Mode Encryption Mode Disable Change Box ID Box ID Depending on the device • Enable • Disable 40 alphabetic characters (upper case), numerals, and symbols (’#’) 322 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED P2X0-0700-07ENZ0 Appendix B Factory Default List Item Contents Setup Power Management Shutdown by External Power Management Unit Setting value Enable Not selected Delay until Shutdown (min.) 0 Set management unit interface PMAN Setting range • CM#0 • CM#1 0 − 15 (minutes) • Power Synchronized Unit • PMAN • Manual Setup Subsystem Parameters Set FC Port Parameters (for "CA" port mode) Power Failure Signal Positive • Positive • Negative Low Battery Signal Positive • Positive • Negative UPS Shutdown Signal Not selected • Enable • Not selected Positive • Positive • Negative Load Balance Selected • Selected • Not selected Reject INQUIRY from Unauthorized Host Not selected • Selected • Not selected Checkcode Enforcement Not selected • Selected • Not selected Internal Bus Recovery Not selected • Selected • Not selected Connection FC-AL • Fabric • FC-AL Set Loop ID Manual • Manual • Auto Loop ID Manual 0 Auto Ascending Last 2 digits of 0x00 to 0x7D • Ascending • Descending 323 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED P2X0-0700-07ENZ0 Appendix B Factory Default List Item Contents Set FC Port Parameters (for "CA" port mode) Setting value Transfer Rate (Gbit/s) Auto Negotiation Setting range • For 4Gbit/s models - Auto Negotiation - 1 - 2 - 4 • For 8Gbit/s models - Auto Negotiation - 2 - 4 - 8 Frame Size (bytes) 2048 • 2048 • 1024 • 512 Host Affinity Disable • Enable • Disable Host Response 0:Default • 0:Default • Host Response (Number: Name) Set FC Port Parameters (for "RA" port mode) Reset Scope I_T_L • I_T_L • T_L Release Reservation if Chip is Reset Disable • Enable • Disable Connection FC-AL • Fabric • FC-AL Set Loop ID Manual • Manual • Auto Loop ID Manual 0 Auto Ascending • Ascending • Descending Auto Negotiation • Auto Transfer Rate (Gbit/s) Last 2 digits of 0x00 to 0x7D Negotiation • 2 • 4 • 8 324 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED P2X0-0700-07ENZ0 Appendix B Factory Default List Item Set iSCSI Port Parameters Contents TCP/IP Settings Setting value Setting range 0 − 255 IP Address 192.168.x.y Subnet Mask 255.255.255.0 0 − 255 (255.255.255.255 is not allowed) 0 − 255 (*2) iSCSI Settings Default Gateway 0.0.0.0 iSNS Server Disable iSCSI Name iqn.200009.com.fujitsu: storagesystem.eternu s-dxl:00xxxxxx Alias Name − Host Affinity Disable • Enable • Disable Host Response 0:Default • 0:Default • Host • Enable • Disable 4 − 223 alphanumeric characters and symbols ('-', ':', '.') (*3) General Settings 1 − 31 alphanumeric characters, symbols, and blanks Response (Number: Name) Jumbo Frame Disable • Enable • Disable Transfer Rate 1Gbit/s • Auto Negotiation • 100Mbit/s • 1Gbit/s Reset Scope I_T_L • I_T_L • T_L Release Reservation if Chip is Reset Disable • Enable • Disable 325 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED P2X0-0700-07ENZ0 Appendix B Factory Default List Item Contents Set iSCSI Port Parameters Security Set SAS Port Parameters Port Settings Setting value Setting range CHAP OFF CHAP User Name − 1 − 255 alphanumeric characters, symbols, and blanks Password − 12 − 100 alphanumeric characters, symbols, and blanks New Password − 12 − 100 alphanumeric characters, symbols, and blanks Confirm new Password − 12 − 100 alphanumeric characters, symbols, and blanks Header Digest OFF • OFF • CRC32C Data Digest OFF • OFF • CRC32C Host Affinity Disable • Enable • Disable Host Response 0:Default • 0:Default • Host • ON • OFF Response (Number: Name) Setup Host Response Reset Scope I_T_L • I_T_L • T_L Release Reservation if Chip is Reset Disable • Enable • Disable Response Name 0:Default Byte-0 of Inquiry Response No Conversion (Default) 1 − 16 alphanumeric characters, symbols (except ',' and '?', and '% used as the first letter'), and blanks • No Conversion (Default) • Custom 326 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED P2X0-0700-07ENZ0 Appendix B Factory Default List Item Setup Host Response Contents Inquiry VPD ID Type Setting value Setting range Type1 + Type3 (Default) • Type1 + Type3 (Default) • Type1 • Type3 Inquiry Standard Data Version Version 5 (Default) • Version 5 (Default) • Version 4 • Version 3 Command Timeout Interval Default (25sec.) • Default (25sec.) • Customize (10 - 255 sec.) (numerals) Load Balance Response [Disable] Unit Attention (Default) • [Disable] Unit Attention (Default) • [Disable] Busy • [Disable] Queue Full Reservation Conflict Response for Test Unit Ready Normal (Default) Change Volume Mapping No Report (Default) • Normal (Default) • Conflict • No Report (Default) • Report Volume Capacity Expansion No Report (Default) • No Report (Default) • Report Vendor Unique Sense Code No Report (Default) • No Report (Default) • Report Host Specific Mode Normal (Default) • Normal (Default) • AIX Mode • HP-UX Mode Asymmetric / Symmetric Logical Unit Access ACTIVEACTIVE / PREFERRED _PATH (Default) • ACTIVEACTIVE / PREFERRED _PATH (Default) • ACTIVE / ACTIVE Unrecoverable Sense Report Mode Disable (Default) • Disable (Default) • Enable 327 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED P2X0-0700-07ENZ0 Appendix B Factory Default List Item Contents Setup Host Response Sense Data Conversion Setting value No Conversion (Default) Setting range • No Conversion (Default) • Linux Recommended (When not using GRMPD) • Windows Recommended (When not using GR/ ETERNUS MPD or Device Driver) • Customize − SK/ASC/ASCQ • SK: Sense Key • ASC: Additional Sense Code • ASCQ: Additional Sense Code Qualifier Modify Reset Group *1: *2: *3: Set Reset Group Different reset groups for each port Different values are specified in the factory settings in order to distribute the load on the REMCS center. "x" in the setting value indicates the CM number. Values for "y" vary depending on the port number. CM0 Port-0 : 192.168.2.64 CM0 Port-1 : 192.168.2.65 CM1 Port-0 : 192.168.3.66 CM1 Port-1 : 192.168.3.67 "x" in the setting value indicates a specific 6-digit number that is assigned to each ETERNUS DX60/ DX80. 328 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED P2X0-0700-07ENZ0 Appendix C The Maximum Number of Concurrent Volume Formats The maximum number of concurrent volume formats (*1) differs depending on RAID levels, volume capacity, and the model. If 80 or more 2TB disks have been installed in the ETERNUS DX80/DX90, the maximum number of concurrent volume formats may be exceeded. In this case, an error message appears. Use the following procedure to check the maximum number of concurrent volume formats. Calculate the corresponding value for each formatting volume. When the total of corresponding values for all the formatting volumes is smaller than the maximum value, concurrent volume formats are available. *1: Includes the volume format that is performed automatically when creating a new volume. Procedure 1 Calculate the corresponding value for each formatting volume. Use the following formula to calculate the value for each volume to be formatted. Corresponding Value for each Volume = Volume Capacity (MB) / Coefficient Volume capacity: The capacity of the volume to be formatted (MB). Coefficient The following table shows the coefficient for each RAID level where the target volume is registered. RAID1 1D+1D Coefficient 4 RAID1+0 Coefficient RAID5 Coefficient 2D+2D 4 2D+1P 4 3D+3D 6 3D+1P 6 4D+4D 8 4D+1P 8 5D+5D 5 5D+1P 5 6D+6D 6 6D+1P 6 7D+7D 7 7D+1P 7 8D+8D 8 8D+1P 8 9D+9D 4.5 9D+1P 4.5 10D+10D 5 10D+1P 5 11D+11D 5.5 11D+1P 5.5 12D+12D 6 12D+1P 6 13D+13D 6.5 13D+1P 6.5 14D+14D 7 14D+1P 7 15D+15D 7.5 15D+1P 7.5 16D+16D 8 329 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED P2X0-0700-07ENZ0 Appendix C The Maximum Number of Concurrent Volume Formats RAID5+0 2 Coefficient RAID6 Coefficient (2D+1P) × 2 8 3D+2P 6 (3D+1P) × 2 12 4D+2P 8 (4D+1P) × 2 16 5D+2P 5 (5D+1P) × 2 10 6D+2P 6 (6D+1P) × 2 12 7D+2P 7 (7D+1P) × 2 14 8D+2P 8 (8D+1P) × 2 16 9D+2P 4.5 (9D+1P) × 2 9 10D+2P 5 (10D+1P) × 2 10 11D+2P 5.5 (11D+1P) × 2 11 12D+2P 6 (12D+1P) × 2 12 13D+2P 6.5 (13D+1P) × 2 13 14D+2P 7 (14D+1P) × 2 14 (15D+1P) × 2 15 Compare the total of the corresponding values and the maximum number of concurrent volume formats. If the total of the corresponding values is smaller than the maximum value, concurrent volume formats are available. Total of Corresponding Values < Maximum Value The total of corresponding values: Add up the corresponding values for each volume. The maximum value of concurrent volume formats: The following table shows the maximum value of concurrent volume formats for each model. The maximum value: 33,554,432 End of procedure The following table shows an example when formatting volumes in the RAID5(5D+1P) in which the capacity is 9,331,200MB. Number of volumes Formula and corresponding value Concurrent volume format 17 (9,331,200 / 5) × 17 = 31,726,080 Available 18 (9,331,200 / 5) × 18 = 33,592,320 Not Available Up to 17 volumes can be formatted concurrently. However, 18 or more volumes cannot be formatted. Retry the procedure after the current volume formatting is complete. 330 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED P2X0-0700-07ENZ0 Index A F Add Drive Enclosure .............................................. 286 Advanced..................................................... 20, 21, 192 Advanced Copy .............................................. 139, 145 Management ..................................................... 139 Status ................................................................... 61 FC Set Port Parameters........................................ 254 Setup Host ........................................................ 264 Firefox ................................................................. 11, 307 G C GUI ................................................................................ 9 Change Box ID........................................................ 240 Change CM Ownership ......................................... 109 Change Password .................................................... 26 Configure Affinity Group .......................................... 67 Controller Enclosure ................................................ 49 Controller Module ..................................................... 49 copy session............................................................ 163 list ......................................................................... 61 manage.............................................................. 152 Create Volume .......................................................... 66 D H host response set....................................................................... 254 Host Sense.............................................................. 245 Hot Spare Assign.................................................................. 94 Release ............................................................... 96 I Define Host................................................................ 66 Define LUN Mapping................................................ 67 Disk....................................................................... 53, 56 maximum number ............................................ 285 Disk Capacity ............................................................ 70 Disk Error Statistics................................................ 300 Display Performance Information ........................ 299 Display SMTP Log.................................................. 213 Drive Enclosure ........................................................ 54 maximum number ............................................ 285 E EC ............................................................ 139, 140, 158 Eco-mode Apply Eco-mode Schedule ............................. 108 General Setting................................................. 104 Schedule Setting .............................................. 105 E-Mail ............................................................... 156, 245 E-Mail Address................................................ 212, 219 ETERNUS SF AdvancedCopy Manager ............ 139 ETERNUS SF Storage Cruiser ............................ 296 Event Log................................................................. 289 Expander.................................................................... 54 Initialize Snap Data Volume ................................. 126 internal log............................................... 230, 289, 290 Internet Explorer................................................ 11, 302 iSCSI Set Port Parameters........................................ 257 Setup Host ........................................................ 268 L LAN ............................................................................... 9 LAN cable.................................................................. 12 LUN ............................................................................ 67 Configure LUN Mapping ................................. 131 LUN Concatenation ......................................... 120 number of LUNs............................................... 132 331 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED P2X0-0700-07ENZ0 Index M R Mail Address............................................................ 221 MIB............................................................................ 203 MIB definition file .................................................... 208 MIB View.................................................................. 206 Modify Date and Time............................................ 235 Modify Port Mode ..................................................... 26 Modify REC Buffer.................................................. 188 Modify Storage System Name.............................. 237 Monitor ......................................................... 20, 21, 192 RAID Group Create............................................................ 66, 88 Delete .................................................................. 93 Status................................................................... 57 RAID level Number of disks that can be set...................... 88 The maximum number of RAID groups that can be set................................................ 89 RAID Migration ....................................................... 122 REC Buffer Status.................................................... 65 REC Multiplicity ...................................................... 186 Register ................................................................... 155 Register Copy License .......................................... 155 REMCS ESAT ........................................................ 218 N Name .......................................................................... 48 NTP server .............................................................. 236 S O SAS Set Port Parameters........................................ 262 Setup Host ........................................................ 271 SAS Cable........................................................... 52, 55 SDP .......................................................................... 144 SDPE ....................................................................... 144 SDPV ....................................................................... 144 Set Copy Path ........................................................ 164 Set Date and Time................................................... 26 Set Port Parameters ........................................ 26, 254 Setup Encryption Mode......................................... 238 Setup Event Notification........................................ 245 Setup Log Sending Parameters .......................... 230 Setup Network Environment .................................. 26 Setup Remote Support.......................................... 218 Site Certificate ........................................................ 302 Snap Data Volume (SDV)..................................... 144 SnapOPC+............................. 126, 143, 152, 156, 162 SNMP Trap ..................................................... 156, 245 SNMP Trap Test .............................................. 209 SSD .......................................................................... 285 Standard ...................................................... 20, 21, 192 Start/Stop Performance Monitoring..................... 296 Stop/Restart Remote Support.............................. 233 Storage System Name Set........................................................................ 26 OPC ......................................................... 139, 142, 158 Operating Environment............................................ 11 Operating Topology.................................................. 12 P Port (for FC model)..................................................... 50 (for iSCSI model)................................................ 51 (for SAS model).................................................. 52 Port Error Statistics ................................................ 301 Power Supply Unit.............................................. 52, 55 Q QuickOPC........................................................ 143, 162 T Turn on locator beacon ........................................... 48 332 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED P2X0-0700-07ENZ0 Index U User Account Initialize.............................................................. 197 Setup.................................................................. 192 User Management.................................................. 192 User Role................................................................... 20 V VDS .............................................................. 26, 48, 237 W web browser .......................................................... 9, 11 When Host Affinity function is not used .............. 253 When the host affinity function is not used........... 67 When the host affinity function is used ................. 67 When using Host Affinity function ........................ 252 Windows Volume Shadow Copy Service ........... 139 333 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED P2X0-0700-07ENZ0 ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide P2X0-0700-07ENZ0 Date of issuance: January 2013 Issuance responsibility: FUJITSU LIMITED • The content of this manual is subject to change without notice. • This manual was prepared with the utmost attention to detail. However, Fujitsu shall assume no responsibility for any operational problems as the result of errors, omissions, or the use of information in this manual. • Fujitsu assumes no liability for damages to third party copyrights or other rights arising from the use of any information in this manual. • The content of this manual may not be reproduced or distributed in part or in its entirety without prior permission from Fujitsu.